View S7-300_1305689.PDF datasheet online --- IC-ON-LINE

Datasheet File OCR Text:

important information, contents product overview 1 installation 2 addressing 3 wiring 4 networking 5 commissioning 6 maintenance 7 cpus 8 cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9 cycle and response times of the S7-300 10 cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11 tips and tricks 12 appendices glossary, index edition 1 ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation manual this manual is part of the documentation package with order no.: 6es7 398-8aa03-8ba0 simatic
index-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 ! danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precau- tions are not taken. ! warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precau- tions are not taken. ! caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. qualified personnel only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and sys- tems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. correct usage note the following: ! warning this device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by siemens. this product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed cor- rectly, and operated and maintained as recommended. trademarks simatic r , simatic hmi r and simatic net r are registered trademarks of siemens ag. some of other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. safety guidelines this manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. these notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: we have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hard- ware and software described. since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. however, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. suggestions for improvement are welcomed. disclaimer of liability copyright siemens ag 1998 all rights reserved the reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. offenders will be liable for damages. all rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. siemens ag automation and drives (a&d) industrial automation systems (as) postfach 4848, d- 90327 nrnberg e siemens ag 1998 technical data subject to change. siemens aktiengesellschaft
iii S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 important information purpose of the manual the information contained in this manual enables you to: s install and wire an S7-300 programmable controller. s look up operator entries, functional descriptions and the technical specifications relevant to the S7-300's cpus. you will find the function descriptions and technical specifications for the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules in the module specifications reference manual . delivery package this documentation package (order number 6es7 398-8aa03-8ba0) comprises two manuals and an instruction list with the following contents: S7-300 programmable controller, hardware and installation s mechanical and electrical configuration s installation and wiring s preparing the S7-300 for operation s characteristics and technical data for the S7-300 cpus s general technical data s power supply modules s digital modules s analog modules s order numbers for the S7-300 S7-300, m7-300 programmable controllers, module specifications instruction list s instruction set for all cpus s brief description of instructions and execution times in relation to the individual cpus a detailed description of all instructions with examples can be found in the step 7 manuals (see appendix h). you can also order the instruction list separately: 6es7 398-8aa03-8bn0
important information iv S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 scope of the manual this manual applies for the following cpus: cpu order no. as of version firmware hardware cpu 312 ifm 6es7 312-5ac02-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 313 6es7 313-1ad03-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 314 6es7 314-1ae04-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 314 ifm 6es7 314-5ae03-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 315 6es7 315-1af03-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 315-2 dp 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 316-2 dp 6es7 316-2ag00-0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 318-2 6es7 318-2aj00-0ab0 1.0.0 01 this manual describes all modules that are valid at the time the manual is released. for new modules or newer versions of modules, we reserve the option to add to the manual a product information containing the current information on this module. changes since the previous version the following changes have been made since the previous version ( S7-300 programmable controller, hardware and installation manual (order no. 6es7 398-8aa02-8ba0), edition 2): s new cpus: cpu 316-2 dp cpu 318-2 (refer to section11.1! it describes important differences between the cpu 318-2 and other cpus ). s the cpu 316 is no longer included in the scope of delivery for the S7-300 and therefore not described in this manual. s separate versions for cpu firmware and hardware: you can find the firmware version of the cpu (v 1.0.0) under the front cover, on the left next to the power supply connections. you can find the hardware version of the cpu on the front cover. s you can save the firmware of the cpu on the memory card (not 318-2). s new for the cpu 315-2 dp routing direct communication equidistance
important information v S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 standards, certificates and approvals the S7-300 programmable controller meets the requirements and criteria of standard iec 1131, part 2. the S7-300 meets the requirements for the ce mark. approvals for csa, ul and fm have been granted for the S7-300. see appendix a for detailed information on standards and approvals. recycling and disposal the simatic S7-300 can be recycled thanks to the low level of pollutants in its equipment. please contact the following address for environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old simatic equipment: siemens aktiengesellschaft anlagenbau und technische dienstleistungen atd erc essen recycling/remarketing fronhauser str. 69 d-45127 essen phone: +49 201/816 1540 (hotline) fax: +49 201/816 1504 documentation required depending on the cpu, you require the following documentation for installing your S7-300: hardware and installation , manual reference manual module specifications instruction list documentation package order number 6es7 398-8aa03-8ba0 the following documentation is required for installing the S7-300 and for preparing it for operation: for cpus 312 ifm and 314 ifm, you will also require the description of the integrated functions and the control functions in step 7: integrated functions manual system and standard functions reference manual order no. 6es7 398-8ca00-8ba0 (you can find this in step 7 as an electronic manual)
important information vi S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 documentation for programming in appendix h you will find a list of the documentation required to program and commission the S7-300. in addition, you will find a list of specialist books on programmable controllers. cd-rom furthermore, the complete simatic s7 documentation is available on cd-rom. guide to help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following access aids: s at the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual. s an overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left-hand column on each page of each chapter. s you will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. the glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual. s at the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you rapid access to the information you need. additional support please contact your local siemens representative if you have any queries about the products described in this manual. a list of siemens representatives worldwide is contained in the appendix to this manual. if you have any questions or suggestions concerning this manual, please fill in the form at the end of this manual and return it to the specified address. please feel free to enter your personal assessment of the manual in the form provided. we offer a range of courses to help get you started with the simatic s7 programmable controller. please contact your local training center or the central training center in nuremberg, d-90327 germany (tel. +49 (911) 895-3154)
important information vii S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 constantly updated information you can receive up-to-date information on simatic products from the following sources: s on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/ s on the fax polling number +49-8765-93 00-55 00 in addition, the simatic customer support provides up-to-date information and downloads for users of simatic products: s on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs s via the simatic customer support mailbox on the following number: +49 (911) 895-7100 to access the mailbox, use a modem with up to v.34 (28.8 kbps), and set the parameters as follows: 8, n, 1, ansi. alternatively, access it using isdn (x.75, 64 kbps). you can reach the simatic customer support by telephone at +49 (911) 895-7000 and by fax at +49 (911) 895-7002. queries can also be addressed to us by internet mail or by mail to the mailbox specified above.
important information viii S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
ix S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 contents important information 1 product overview 2 installation 2.1 configuring an S7-300 installation 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 horizontal and vertical installation 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 clearance measurements 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.3 installation dimensions of the modules 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.4 arranging the modules on a single rack 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.5 arranging the modules on multiple racks (not cpu 312 ifm/313) 2-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 installation 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1 installing the rail 2-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 installing modules on the rail 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.3 after installation 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 addressing 3.1 slot-based addressing for modules (default addressing) 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 user-defined address allocation with the cpu 31x-2 dp 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 addressing the signal modules 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 addressing the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm and cpu 314 ifm 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 wiring 4.1 electrical configuration 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 general rules and guidelines for operating an S7-300 programmable controller 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 configuring the S7-300 process i/os 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference potential (not cpu 312 ifm) 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5 S7-300 configuration with isolated modules 4-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6 configuration of an S7-300 with non-isolated modules 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7 cable/wiring routing inside buildings 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8 cable/wiring routing outside buildings 4-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9 protecting digital output modules from inductive overvoltage 4-17 . . . . . . . . . 4.2 lightning protection 4-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 lightning protection zone concept 4-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 rules for the transition between lightning protection zones 0 1 4-23 . 4.2.3 rules for the transitions between 1 2 and greater lightning protection zones 4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 sample circuit for overvoltage protection of networked S7-300s 4-28 . . . . . .
contents x S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.3 wiring 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 wiring rules 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 wiring the power supply module and cpu 4-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3 wiring the front connectors of the signal modules 4-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4 connecting shielded cables via a shield contact element 4-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 networking 5.1 configuring a subnet 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 prerequisites 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 rules for configuring a subnet 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 cable lengths 5-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 network components 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 profibus bus cable 5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 bus connectors 5-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 plugging the bus connector into a module 5-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 rs 485 repeater 5-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 commissioning 6.1 inserting and changing the memory card (not cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm) 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 inserting the backup battery/accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) 6-4 . . . . . . . . . 6.3 connecting a programming device 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 connecting a programming device to an S7-300 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 connecting the programming device to several nodes 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 connecting a programming device to ungrounded nodes of an mpi subnet 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 switching on a S7-300 for the first time 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 resetting the cpu 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 commissioning the profibus-dp 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 maintenance 7.1 changing the backup/accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 replacing modules 7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 replacing fuses on 120/230v ac digital output modules 7-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 cpus 8.1 control and display elements 8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 status and fault displays 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.2 mode selector 8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.3 backup battery/accumulator 8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.4 memory card 8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.5 mpi and profibus-dp interface 8-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.6 clock and runtime meter 8-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 communication options of the cpu 8-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 testing functions and diagnostics 8-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 testing functions 8-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xi S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.3.2 diagnosis with led displays 8-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3 diagnosis with step 7 8-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 cpus technical specifications 8-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 cpu 312 ifm 8-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 cpu 313 8-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 cpu 314 8-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.4 cpu 314 ifm 8-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.5 cpu 315 8-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.6 cpu 315-2 dp 8-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.7 cpu 316-2 dp 8-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.8 cpu 318-2 8-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9.1 dp address areas of the cpus 31x-2 9-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.1 diagnosis with leds 9-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 diagnosis with step 5 or step 7 9-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.3 reading out the diagnostic data 9-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.4 structure of the slave diagnostic data 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.5 station status 1 to 3 9-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.6 master profibus address 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.7 manufacturer id 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.8 module diagnosis 9-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.9 station diagnosis 9-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.10 interrupts 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6 parameter assignment frame and configuration frame 9-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.1 structure of the parameter assignment frame 9-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 structure of the configuration frame (s7 format) 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 structure of the configuration frame for non-s7 dp masters 9-34 . . . . . . . . . 9.7 direct communication 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 diagnostics in direct communication 9-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 cycle and response times of the S7-300 10.1 cycle time 10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 response time 10-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 calculation examples for cycle time and response time 10-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 interrupt response time 10-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 calculation example for the interrupt response time 10-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6 reproducibility of delay and watchdog interrupts 10-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xii S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 11 cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11.1 the differences between the cpu 318-2 and the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp 11-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 the differences between the cpus 312 ifm to 316 and their previous versions 11-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 tips and tricks a standards, certificates and approvals b obs c execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c.1 sfcs and sfbs c-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.2 iec timers and iec counters c-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c.3 iec functions c-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d system status list in the cpus e dimensioned drawings f guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) f.1 what is esd? f-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f.2 electrostatic charging of persons f-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f.3 general protective measures against electrostatic discharge damage f-4 . g replacement parts and accessories for the cpus of the S7-300 h simatic s7 reference literature i safety of electronic control equipment j siemens worldwide k list of abbreviations glossary index
contents xiii S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 figures 1-1 components of an S7-300 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 horizontal and vertical installation of an S7-300 2-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 clearance measurements for an S7-300 installation 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 module arrangement for an S7-300 programmable controller mounted on one rack 2-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 arrangement of modules in a four-rack S7-300 configuration 2-8 . . . . . . . . 2-5 fixing holes of the 2 m/6.56 ft. rail 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 connecting the protective conductor to the rail 2-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 inserting the key in the cpu 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 applying slot numbers to the modules 2-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 slots of the S7-300 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 addresses of the inputs and outputs of digital modules 3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 addresses of the inputs and outputs of the digital module in slot 4 3-6 . . . . 3-4 addresses of the inputs and outputs of the analog module in slot 4 3-7 . . . 4-1 signal modules operated on a grounded incoming supply 4-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 signal modules powered from the ps 307 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference potential 4-10 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 potentials in a configuration with isolated modules 4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 potentials in a configuration with the non-isolated sm 334 analog input/output module; ai 4/ao 2 8/8bit 4-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 relay contact for emergency stop in the output circuit 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 suppressor circuit with dc-operated coils with diodes and zener diodes 4-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 suppressor circuit with ac-operated coils 4-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 lightning protection zones of a building 4-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 example of the interconnection of networked S7-300s 4-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 wiring the power supply module and cpu to the power connector 4-33 . . . . 4-13 setting the mains voltage for the ps 307 4-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 bringing the front connector into the wiring position 4-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 configuration of two signal modules with shield contact element 4-40 . . . . . 4-16 attaching shielded 2-wire cables to a shield contact element 4-41 . . . . . . . . 5-1 terminating resistor on the bus connector switched on and off 5-7 . . . . . . 5-2 terminating resistor on the rs 485 repeater 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 connecting terminating resistors in an mpi subnet 5-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 example of an mpi subnet 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 example of a profibus subnet 5-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 example of a configuration with the cpu 315-2 dp in an mpi and profibus subnet 5-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 maximum cable length between two rs 485 repeaters 5-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 cable lengths in an mpi subnet 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 bus connector (6es7 ... ): terminating resistor switched on and off 5-18 . . 5-10 removing the slide on the rs 485 repeater 5-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 lengths of the stripped insulation for connection to the rs 485 repeater 5-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 inserting the memory card in the cpu 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 inserting a backup battery in the cpus 313/314 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 connecting a programming device to an S7-300 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 connecting a programming device to several S7-300s 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 connecting a programming device to a subnet 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 programming device connected to an ungrounded S7-300 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xiv S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6-7 switching sequence for the mode selector for resetting the cpu 6-13 . . . . . 6-8 switching sequence for the mode selector for cold start (cpu 318-2 only) 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 changing the backup battery in the cpu 313/314 7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 unlocking the front connector and detaching the module from the rail 7-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 removing the front connector coding key 7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 installing a new module 7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 plugging in the front connector 7-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 location of the fuses on digital output modules 7-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 control and display elements of the cpus 8-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 status and fault displays of the cpus 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 the principle of forcing with S7-300 cpus (cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp) 8-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 display of the states of the interrupt inputs of the cpu 312 ifm 8-20 . . . . . . . 8-5 front view of the cpu 312 ifm 8-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 terminal assignment diagram of the cpu 312 ifm 8-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 312 ifm 8-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 display of the states of the interrupt inputs of the cpu 314 ifm 8-34 . . . . . . . 8-9 front view of the cpu 314 ifm 8-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 terminal assignment diagram of the cpu 314 ifm 8-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 314 ifm (special inputs and analog inputs/outputs) 8-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 314 ifm (digital inputs/outputs) 8-46 . . . . . 8-13 wiring the analog inputs of the cpu 314 ifm with a 2-wire measuring transducer 8-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 wiring the analog inputs of the cpu 314 ifm with a 4-wire measuring transducer 8-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 diagnostics with cpu 315-2 dp < 315-2af03 9-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 diagnostics with cpu 31x-2 (315-2 dp as of 315-2af03) 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 diagnostic addresses for dp master and dp slave 9-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 intermediate memory in the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 diagnostic addresses for dp master and dp slave 9-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 structure of the slave diagnostic data 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 structure of the module diagnosis of the cpu 31x-2 9-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 structure of the station diagnosis 9-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 bytes +4 to +7 for diagnostic and process interrupts 9-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 standardized portion of the parameter assignment frame (example) 9-30 . . 9-11 parameters for the cpu 31x-2 9-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 description of byte 0 of the cpu's address area identifiers 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 description of byte 1 of the cpu's address area identifiers 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 direct communication with cpu 31x-2 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 diagnostic address for the receiver during direct communication 9-37 . . . . . 10-1 component parts of the cycle time 10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 shortest response time 10-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 longest response time 10-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 overview of the bus runtime on profibus-dp at 1.5 mbps and 12 mbps 10-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 sample configuration 11-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e-1 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 312 ifm e-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e-2 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp e-2 . . . . e-3 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 318-2 e-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xv S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 e-4 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, front view e-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e-5 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, side view e-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . f-1 electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person f-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tables 1-1 components of an S7-300 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 installation dimensions of the S7-300 modules 2-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 connecting cables for interface modules 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 fixing holes for rails 2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 module accessories 2-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 installing the modules on the rail 2-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 slot numbers for s7 modules 2-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 start addresses for the signal modules 3-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm 3-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 vde specifications for configuring a plc system 4-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 cabling inside buildings 4-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 high-voltage protection of cables using surge protection components 4-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 low-voltage protection for lightning protection zone 1 2 4-26 . . . . . . . 4-5 low-voltage protection for lightning protection zone 2 3 4-27 . . . . . . . . 4-6 example of a configuration fulfilling lightning protection requirements (legend for figure 4-11) 4-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 wiring rules for the power supply and cpu 4-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 wiring rules for module front connectors 4-31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 wiring the front connector 4-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 preparing the signal module for operation 4-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 assignment of cable cross-sections and terminal elements 4-39 . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 permissible mpi/profibus addresses 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 mpi addresses of cps/fms in an S7-300 (with the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp) 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 permissible cable lengths in an mpi subnet segment 5-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 permissible cable lengths in a profibus subnet depending on the transmission rate 5-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 lengths of spur lines per segment 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 network components 5-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 properties of the profibus bus cable 5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 specifications for installation of indoor bus cable 5-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 possible reasons for mres request by cpu 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 internal cpu events on memory reset 6-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 the differences in control and display elements between cpus 8-2 . . . . . . 8-2 using a backup battery or accumulator 8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 memory cards 8-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 cpu interfaces 8-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 characteristics of the clock of the cpus 8-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 cpu communication options 8-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 diagnostic leds of the cpu 8-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 start information for ob 40 for the interrupt inputs of the integrated i/os 8-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 start information for ob 40 for the interrupt inputs for the integrated i/o 8-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
contents xvi S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8-10 characteristic features of the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm 8-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 meaning of the busf led of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 reading out the diagnostic data with step 7 9-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 evaluating run-stop transitions of the dp slaves in the dp master 9-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 configuration example for the address areas of the intermediate memory 9-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 meaning of the busf leds in the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-16 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 reading out the diagnostic data with step 5 and step 7 in the master system 9-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 evaluating run-stop transitions in the dp master/dp slave 9-20 . . . . . . . . 9-10 structure of station status 1 (byte 0) 9-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 structure of station status 2 (byte 1) 9-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 structure of station status 3 (byte 2) 9-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 structure of the master profibus address (byte 3) 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 structure of the manufacturer identification (bytes 4 and 5) 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 structure of the configuration frame 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 identifiers for the address areas of the intermediate memory 9-33 . . . . . . . . . 9-17 structure of the configuration frame for non-s7 dp masters 9-35 . . . . . . . . . 9-18 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as receiver during direct communication 9-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 evaluation of the station failure of the sender during direct communication 9-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 operating system processing times of the cpus 10-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 process image update of cpus 10-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 cpu-specific factors for the user program processing time 10-7 . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 updating the s7 timers 10-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 update time and sfb runtimes 10-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 extending the cycle by nesting interrupts 10-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 process interrupt response times of the cpus 10-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 diagnostic interrupt response times of the cpus 10-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 reproducibility of the delay and watchdog interrupts of the cpus 10-17 . . . . . d-1 sublists of the system status list of the cpus d-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-2 sublists of the system status list of the cpu 315-2 dp as dp master d-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g-1 accessories and replacement parts g-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . h-1 manuals for configuring and programming the S7-300 h-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . h-2 manuals for profibus-dp h-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . h-3 list of books you can order h-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 product overview modular design the S7-300 has a modular design. you can set up your own individual system by combining components from a comprehensive range of S7-300 modules. the range of modules includes the following components: s cpus for various performance ranges s signal modules for digital and analog input/output (see module specifications reference manual) s function modules for technological functions (see the function module manual for a description). s cp communication processors (see the communication processor manual for a description) s load power supply modules for connecting the S7-300 to 120/230v ac power supplies (see module specifications reference manual) s interface modules for the interconnection of racks in multi-rack installations (see module specifications reference manual) all of the S7-300 modules are contained in housings protected to ip 20, i.e. they are encapsulated and can be operated without a fan. in this chapter in this chapter, we will introduce you to the most important components that go to make up an S7-300. 1
product overview 1-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 structure of an S7-300 an S7-300 programmable controller is made up of the following components: s power supply (ps) s cpu s signal modules (sm) s function modules (fm) s communication processor (cp). several S7-300s can communicate together and with other simatic s7 plcs via profibus bus cables. you require a programming device (pg) to program the S7-300. you hook the programming device up to the S7-300 with a special programming device cable. figure 1-1 shows a possible configuration with two S7-300 programmable controllers. the components in the shaded area are described in this manual. power supply (ps) central processing unit (cpu) signal module (sm) profibus bus cable programming device cable figure 1-1 components of an S7-300
product overview 1-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 components of an S7-300 you have a number of components at your disposal for installing and starting up an S7-300 programmable controller. table 1-1 lists the major components and their functions: table 1-1 components of an S7-300 components function illustration rail accessory: shield contact element ... accommodates the S7-300 modules power supply (ps) ... converts the power system voltage (120/230v ac) into 24v dc for the S7-300 and load power supply for 24v dc load circuits cpu accessory: s cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/ 316-2 dp/318-2 memory card backup battery (or accumulator for real-time clock) except for cpu 313) s cpu 314 ifm backup battery (or accumulator for real-time clock) front connector s cpu 312 ifm front connector ... executes the user program; supplies the S7-300 backplane bus with 5 v; communicates with other nodes in an mpi network via the mpi interface. you can also use the cpu 31x-2 dp/318-2 in a profibus subnet: s as a dp master s as a dp slave on an s7/m7 dp master or another dp master. signal modules (sm) (digital input modules, digital output modules, digital input/output modules) analog input module analog output module analog input/output modules) accessory: front connector ... match different process signal levels to the S7-300
product overview 1-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 1-1 components of an S7-300, continued components illustration function function modules (fm) accessories: front connector ... for time-critical and memory- intensive process signal processing tasks, for example, positioning or closed-loop control communication processor (cp). accessory: connecting cable ... relieves the cpu of communication tasks, for example, cp 342-5 dp for connection to profibus-dp. simatic top connect accessories: front connector module with ribbon cable connection ... for wiring of the digital modules interface module (im) accessories: connecting cables ... interconnects the individual tiers of an S7-300 profibus bus cable with bus connector ... interconnects stations on an mpi or profibus subnet programming device cable ... connects a cpu to a programming device/pc rs 485 repeaters ... for amplifying the signals in an mpi or profibus subnet and for connecting segments in these systems programming device (pg) or pc with the step 7 software package ... configures, initializes, programs and tests the S7-300
2-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 installation introduction in this chapter we will show you how to carry out the mechanical configuration, and prepare and install the S7-300 components. to set up a S7-300, you must take into account the configuration of the electrical setup. make sure you also read chapter 3, awiringo. contents section contents page 2.1 configuration of an S7-300 setup 2-2 2.2 installation 2-9 open modules the modules of an S7-300 are open components. that means you can only install the S7-300 in housings, cabinets or electrical operating areas that are only accessible by key or a special tool. only trained or authorized personnel should have access to the housings, cabinets or electrical operating areas. 2
installation 2-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.1 configuring an S7-300 installation section contents page 2.1.1 horizontal and vertical installation 2-2 2.1.2 clearance measurements 2-3 2.1.3 installation dimensions of the modules 2-4 2.1.4 arranging the modules on a single rack 2-5 2.1.5 arranging the modules on multiple racks (not cpu 312 ifm/313) 2-6 2.1.1 horizontal and vertical installation installation you can install your S7-300 in either a horizontal or vertical position. permissible ambient temperature s horizontal installation from 0 to 60 _ c s vertical installation from 0 to 40 _ c horizontal installation vertical installation you must always position the cpu and the power supply at the bottom or on the left. figure 2-1 horizontal and vertical installation of an S7-300
installation 2-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.1.2 clearance measurements rules if you adhere to the minimum clearance measurements: s you will ensure that the S7-300 modules do not get too hot. s you will have adequate space for inserting and removing the S7-300 modules. s you will have sufficient space for running cables. s the height of the S7-300 mounting rack increases to 185 mm. despite this, you must maintain a clearance of 40 mm (1.56 in.). note if you use a shield contact element (see section 4.3.4), the dimension specifications apply from the lower edge of the shield contact element. clearance measurements figure 2-2 shows the necessary clearances between the individual racks and to the adjacent equipment, cable ducts, cabinet walls etc. for standard S7-300 configurations on several racks. 40 mm (1.56 in.) 40 mm (1.56 in.) 20 mm (0.78 in.) 20 mm (0.78 in.) aaaaaaaaaaaaaa 40 mm (1.56 in.) 40 mm (1.56 in.) a 200 mm (7.81 in.) + a for example, cable duct figure 2-2 clearance measurements for an S7-300 installation
installation 2-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.1.3 installation dimensions of the modules table 2-1 shows the installation dimensions of the S7-300 modules. table 2-1 installation dimensions of the S7-300 modules modules module width module height max. installa- tion depth power supply ps 307, 2 a power supply ps 307, 5 a power supply ps 307, 10 a 50 mm (1.95 in.) 80 mm (3.12 in.) 200 mm (7.8 in) cpu 31x/312 ifm, cpu 314 ifm/cpu 318-2 80 mm (3.12 in.) 160 mm (6.24 in.) 130 mm or digital input module sm 321 digital output module sm 322 relay output module sm 322 digital input/output module sm 323 simulator module sm 374 40 mm (1.56 in.) 125 mm, 185 mm with shield contact element or 180 mm (7.02 in.) with front cover of cpu and im 361 open (195 mm (8 00 in ) for analog input module sm 331 analog output module sm 332 analog input/output module sm 334 40 mm (1.56 in.) (8.00 in.) for cpu 312 ifm) interface module im 360 interface module im 361 interface module im 365 40 mm (1.56 in.) 80 mm (3.12 in.) 40 mm (1.56 in.) rail length depending on your S7-300 configuration, you can use rails of the following lengths: rail usable lengths for modules remarks 160 mm (6.24 in.) 482.6 mm (18.82 in.) 530 mm (20.67 in.) 830 mm (32.37 in.) 2000 mm (1.56 in.) 120 mm (4.68 in.) 450 mm (17.55 in.) 480 mm (18.72 in.) 780 mm (30.42 in.) cut to length required comes with fixing holes fixing holes must be drilled
installation 2-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.1.4 arranging the modules on a single rack rules the following rules apply to the arrangement of the modules on a single rack: s no more than eight modules(sm, fm, cp) may be installed to the right of the cpu. s the number of modules (sm, fm, cp) that can be plugged in is limited by the amount of power they draw from the S7-300's backplane bus (see the table containing the technical specifications of the various modules). the power input from the S7-300 backplane bus to all the modules installed on a mounting rack must not exceed the following: for the cpus 313/314/314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/ 316-2 dp/318-2 1.2 a for the cpu 312 ifm 0.8 a figure 2-3 shows the arrangement of the modules in an S7-300 configuration with 8 signal modules. ps cpu sm/fm/cp figure 2-3 module arrangement for an S7-300 programmable controller mounted on one rack
installation 2-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.1.5 arranging the modules on multiple racks (not cpu 312 ifm/313) exception the cpu 312 ifm and cpu 313 can only be used for a configuration on one rack. rules the following rules apply to the arrangement of modules on more than one rack: s the interface module is always be installed in slot 3, to the left of the first signal module. s no more than 8 modules (sm, fm, cp) are permitted per rack. these modules are always located to the right of the interface modules. exception: in the case of the cpu 314 ifm, a module cannot be inserted in slot 11 on rack 3 (see chapter 3). s the number of modules (sm, fm, cp) that can be installed is limited by the maximum permissible current that can be drawn from the S7-300 backplane bus. the power consumption must not exceed 1.2 a per line (see technical specifications of the modules). prerequisite: interface modules interface modules that relay the S7-300 backplane bus from one rack to the next are required in multi-rack configurations. the cpu is always located on rack 0. interface module to be used for ... order no. im 360 rack 0 6es7 360-3aa01-0aa0 im 361 rack 1 to 3 6es7 361-3ca01-0aa0 two-line configuration only.. im 365 s rack 0 6es7 365-0ba00-0aa0 im 365 r rack 1
installation 2-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 connecting cables for the im 360/361 interface module the following connecting cables are available for the interface modules: table 2-2 connecting cables for interface modules length order no. of the connecting cable 1 m 6es7 368-3bb01-0aa0 2.5 m (8.2 ft.) 6es7 368-3bc51-0aa0 5 m 6es7 368-3bf01-0aa0 10 m 6es7 368-3cb01-0aa0 im 365 interface module the S7-300 offers the im 365 interface module for a configuration on 2 racks. the two im 365 interface modules are connected by a 1 m long cable (fixed wiring). if you use the im 365 interface modules, you can use only signal modules on rack 1. the total current drawn by the inserted signal modules from both mounting racks must not exceed 1.2 a ; the current drawn by mounting rack 1 is limited to 800 ma.
installation 2-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 maximum configuration of an installation figure 2-4 shows the module arrangement in an S7-300 configuration on 4 mounting racks (not cpu 312 ifm/313). ps cpu sms im 368 connecting cable 368 connecting cable 368 connecting cable rack 0 rack 1 rack 2 rack 3 im im im not for cpu 314 ifm (see chapter 3) figure 2-4 arrangement of modules in a four-rack S7-300 configuration
installation 2-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.2 installation section contents page 2.2.1 installing the rail 2-9 2.2.2 installing modules on the rail 2-13 2.2.3 after installation 2-15 2.2.1 installing the rail are you installing a 2-meter rail? if not, you can skip this section and read on from the section entitled dimensioned drawing for fixing holes . if so, the 2-meter rail has to be prepared for installation. proceed as follows: 1. shorten the rail to the required length. 2. mark out: four holes for the fixing screws (dimensions: see table 2-3) a hole to take the fixing screw for the protective conductor. 3. is the rail longer than 830 mm/32.37 in.? if so: you must make additional holes for more fixing screws to ensure the rail is secure. mark out these holes along the groove in the middle section of the rail (see figure 2-5). these additional holes should be at 500 mm (19.5 in) intervals. if not: no further steps must be taken.
installation 2-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4. drill the marked holes to a diameter of 6.5 + 0.2 mm for m6 screws. 5. tighten the m6 screw to fix the protective conductor. groove for drilling extra fixing holes hole for connection of protective conductor hole for fixing screw drilled hole for extra fixing screw hole for fixing screw figure 2-5 fixing holes of the 2 m/6.56 ft. rail
installation 2-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 dimensioned drawing for fixing holes the fixing-hole dimensions for the rail are shown in table 2-3. table 2-3 fixing holes for rails astandardo rail 2 m rail 32.5 mm (1.27 in.) 57.2 mm (2.23 in.) a b 32.5 mm (1.27 in.) 57.2 mm (2.23 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.) approx. 500 mm (19.5 in.) approx. 500 mm (19.5 in.) length of rail dimension a dimension b 160 mm (6.24 in.) 10 mm (0.39 in.) 140 mm (5.46 in.) 482.6 mm (18.82 in.) 8.3 mm (0.32 in.) 466 mm (18.17 in.) 530 mm (20.67 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.) 500 mm (19.5 in.) 830 mm (32.37 in.) 15 mm (0.59 in.) 800 mm (31.2 in.) fixing screws you have a choice of the following screw types for fixing the rail. for type of screw description lateral fixing screws m6 cheese-head screw m6 to iso 1207/ iso 1580 (din 84/din 85) choose a suitable screw length to for your configuration. you will also require 6,4 wash- t iso 7092 (din 433) m6 hexagon-head screw to iso 4017 (din 4017) q ers to iso 7092 (din 433) extra fixing screw (only for 2 m rail) m6 cheese-head screw to iso 1207/ iso 1580 (din 84/din 85)
installation 2-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 installing the rail to install rails, proceed as follows: 1. choose a position for the rail that leaves enough room to install it properly and enough space to cope with the temperature rise of the modules (leave at least 40 mm /1.56 in. free above and below the rail; see page 2-3). 2. screw the rail to its base (size: m6). is this base a metallic plate or a grounded supporting plate? if so: make sure there is a low-impedance connection between the rail and the base. in the case of painted or anodized metals, for instance, use a suitable contacting agent or contact washers. if not: no particular steps are required. 3. connect the rail to the protective conductor. an m6 screw is provided for this purpose on the rail. minimum cross-section from the conductor to the protective conductor: 10 mm 2 . note make absolutely sure that your connection to the protective conductor is low-impedance (see figure 2-6). if the S7-300 is mounted on a hinged rail, you must use a flexible cable to establish the connection to the protective conductor. protective conductor connection figure 2-6 shows you how to connect the protective conductor to the rail. figure 2-6 connecting the protective conductor to the rail
installation 2-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.2.2 installing modules on the rail accessories the accessories you need for installation are included with the modules. appendix g contains a list of accessories and spare parts with the corresponding order numbers. table 2-4 module accessories module accessories included description cpu 1 slot number label for assigning slot numbers 2 keys the key is used for actuating the cpu's mode selector labeling strip (cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm only) for labeling the integrated input and output points of the cpu signal module (sm) 1 bus connector for establishing the electrical connections between the mo- dules 1 labeling strip for labeling the input and output points on the module interface mo- dule (im) 1 slot number label (im 361 and im 365 only) for assigning slot numbers on racks 1 to 3 sequence for installing the modules on the rail 1. power supply module 2. cpu 3. signal module(s) note: if you are installing sm 331 analog input modules, please check before installation whether you have to move the measuring range submodules on the side of the module. (see chapter 4 on analog modules in the module specifications reference manual).
installation 2-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sequence for installation the individual steps to be followed when installing the modules are described below. table 2-5 installing the modules on the rail each signal module comes with a bus connector, but not the cpu. when attaching the bus connectors, always start with the cpu: s remove the bus connector from the last module and plug it into the cpu. s you must not plug a bus connector into the alasto module. hook the modules onto the rail (1), slide them along as far as the module on the left (2), and swing them down into place (3). 1 3 2 bolt the modules tight, applying a torque of between 0.8 and 1.1 nm (7 to 10 in. lb.). 0.8 to 1.1 nm
installation 2-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 2.2.3 after installation inserting the key after installing the cpu on the rail, you can insert the key into the cpu in the stop or run switch position. stop figure 2-7 inserting the key in the cpu assigning slot numbers after installation you can assign a slot number to each module. this makes it easier to assign the modules in the configuration table in step 7 . table 2-6 shows the slot number assignment. table 2-6 slot numbers for s7 modules slot number module remarks 1 power supply (ps) 2 cpu 3 interface module (im) to the right of the cpu 4 1st signal module to the right of the cpu or im 5 2nd signal module 6 3rd signal module 7 4th signal module 8 5th signal module 9 6th signal module 10 7th signal module 11 8th signal module
installation 2-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 applying slot numbers figure 2-8 shows you how to apply the slot numbers.the slot number labels are included with the cpu. 1 2 figure 2-8 applying slot numbers to the modules
3-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 addressing in this chapter in this chapter, you will learn about the different ways of addressing the individual channels of the signal modules. slot-based address allocation slot-based address allocation is the default addressing method on the s7 , i.e. a defined module start address is allocated to each slot number. user-defined address allocation in user-defined address allocation, you can allocate any address within the available cpu address area to any module. user-oriented address allocation on the S7-300 is only possible with the cpu 315-2 dp. in this chapter section contents page 3.1 slot-based address allocation for modules (default addresses) 3-2 3.2 user-defined address allocation with cpu 31x-2 dp 3-4 3.3 addressing the signal modules 3-5 3.4 addressing the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm und cpu 314 ifm 3-8 3
addressing 3-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 3.1 slot-based addressing for modules (default addressing) introduction in slot-based addressing (default addressing), a module start address is allocated to each slot number (see table 3-1). this section shows you which module start address is allocated to which slot number. you need this information to determine the module start addresses on the installed modules. maximum configuration figure 3-1 shows a configuration of the S7-300 on four racks and all of the available module slots. please note that with the cpus 312 ifm and 313, only one configuration is possible on rack 0. im 1 234567891011 rack 3 34567891011 34567891011 slot number 3 4 5 6 7891011 slot number slot number slot number rack 2 rack 1 rack 0 im im figure 3-1 slots of the S7-300
addressing 3-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 module start addresses table 3-1 shows the allocation of the module start addresses to the slot numbers and racks. the input and output addresses for i/o modules start from the same module start address. note in the case of the cpu 314 ifm, a module cannot be plugged into slot 11 on rack 3. the address space is occupied by the integrated inputs and outputs. table 3-1 start addresses for the signal modules rack module start slot number st ar t addresses 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 digital analog ps cpu im 0 256 4 272 8 288 12 304 16 320 20 336 24 352 28 368 1 1 digital analog im 32 384 36 400 40 416 44 432 48 448 52 464 56 480 60 496 2 1 digital analog im 64 512 68 528 72 544 76 560 80 576 84 592 88 608 92 624 3 1 digital analog im 96 640 100 656 104 672 108 688 112 704 116 720 120 736 124 2 752 2 1 not with the cpu 312 ifm/313 2 not with the cpu 314 ifm
addressing 3-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 3.2 user-defined address allocation with the cpu 31x-2 dp only the 315-2 dp, 316-2 dp and 318-2 cpus ... support user-defined address allocation. user-defined address allocation user-defined address allocation means that you are free to allocate any module (sm/fm/cp) an address of your choice. the addresses are allocated in step 7 . you define the start address of the module, and all other addresses of this module are based on this start address. advantages advantages of user-defined address allocation: s optimum utilization of the address areas available, since between the modules, address agapso will not occur. s when generating standard software, you can program addresses which are independent of the S7-300 configuration. addresses of the distributed i/os to address the distributed i/os of the cpus 31x-2 dp, please read section 9.1.
addressing 3-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 3.3 addressing the signal modules introduction this section shows you how signal modules are addressed. you need this information in order to be able to address the channels of the signal modules in your user program. addresses of the digital modules the address of an input or output of a digital module consists of a byte address and a bit address. e.g. i 1.2 input byte ad- dress bit address the byte address depends on the module start address. the bit address is the number printed on the module. figure 3-2 shows you how the addresses of the individual channels of a digital module are obtained. byte address: module start address byte address: module start address + 1 bit address figure 3-2 addresses of the inputs and outputs of digital modules
addressing 3-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 an example for digital modules the example in figure 3-3 shows which default addresses are obtained if a digital module is plugged into slot 4 (i.e. when the module start address is 0). slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the example. address 0.0 address 1.1 address 0.1 address 0.7 address 1.7 address 1.0 slot number 124 ps cpu sm (digital module) figure 3-3 addresses of the inputs and outputs of the digital module in slot 4 addresses of the analog modules the address of an analog input or output channel is always a word address. the channel address depends on the module start address. if the first analog module is plugged into slot 4, it has the default start address 256. the start address of each further analog module increases by 16 per slot (see table 3-1). an analog input/output module has the same start addresses for its input and output channels.
addressing 3-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 an example for analog modules the example in figure 3-4 shows you which default channel addresses are obtained for an analog module plugged into slot 4. as you can see, the input and output channels of an analog input/output module are addressed as of the same address (the module start address). slot number 3 has not been assigned since there is no interface module in the example. slot number 124 ps cpu sm (analog module) inputs channel 0: address 256 channel 1: address 258 : : outputs channel 0: address 256 channel 1: address 258 : : figure 3-4 addresses of the inputs and outputs of the analog module in slot 4
addressing 3-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 3.4 addressing the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm and cpu 314 ifm cpu 312 ifm the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm have the following addresses: table 3-2 integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 312 ifm inputs/outputs addresses remarks 10 digital inputs 124.0 to 125.1 of these, 4 are special channels: 124.6 to 125.1 you can assign these special channels the counter and frequency functions (see the integrated functions ) manual), or you can use them as interrupt inputs. 6 digital outputs 124.0 to 124.5 cpu 314 ifm the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm have the following addresses: table 3-3 integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm inputs/outputs addresses remarks 20 digital inputs 124.0 to 126.3 of these, 4 are special channels: 126.0 to 126.3 you can assign these special channels the functions acountero, afrequency metero, acounter a/bo or apositioningo (see the integrated functions ) manual), or you can use them as interrupt inputs. 16 digital outputs 124.0 to 125.7 4 analog inputs 128 to 135 1 analog output 128 to 129
4-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 wiring introduction in this chapter we will show you how to configure the electrical installation and how to wire an S7-300. to configure an S7-300 you must take into account the mechanical configuration. make sure you also read section 2.1. basic rules in view of the many and varied applications an S7-300, this chapter can only describe a few basic rules on its electrical configuration. you must observe at least these basic rules if you want your S7-300 to operate faultlessly and satisfactorily. contents section contents page 4.1 electrical configuration 4-2 4.2 lightning and overvoltage protection 4-20 4.3 wiring 4-30 4
wiring 4-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1 electrical configuration section contents page 4.1.1 general rules and guidelines for operating an S7-300 programmable controller 4-2 4.1.2 configuring the S7-300 process peripherals 4-5 4.1.3 S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential 4-9 4.1.4 S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference potential (not cpu 312 ifm) 4-9 4.1.5 S7-300 configuration with isolated modules 4-11 4.1.6 configuration of an S7-300 with non-isolated modules 4-13 4.1.7 cabling inside buildings 4-13 4.1.8 cabling outside buildings 4-17 4.1.9 protecting digital output modules against inductive overvoltage 4-17 4.1.1 general rules and guidelines for operating an S7-300 programmable controller as part of a plant or system, and depending on its particular area of application, the S7-300 programmable controller requires that you observe a number of specific rules and guidelines. observe the safety and accident prevention regulations applying to particular applications or situations, for example the relevant machine protection guidelines. this section outlines the most important rules you must observe when integrating your S7-300 in an existing plant or system. emergency stop systems emergency stop systems to iec 204 (corresponds to vde 113) must remain effective in all operating modes of the plant or system.
wiring 4-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 starting up a plant again following specific events the following table shows you what you have to observe when starting up a plant again following certain events. if there is... what must not happen ... a restart following a voltage dip or power failure no dangerous operating states may occur. if necessary, force an emergency stop. a restart following resetting of the emergency stop system an uncontrolled or undefined start-up must be avoided. mains voltage the following table shows you what to watch with respect to the mains voltage. in the case of ... the following must apply permanently installed plants or systems wi- thout all-pole mains disconnect switches there must be a mains disconnect switch or a fuse in the building installation system load power supplies, power supply modu- les the system voltage range set must corres- pond to the local system voltage all circuits of the S7-300 any fluctuations in, or deviations from, the rated mains voltage must be within the per- missible tolerances (see the technical speci- fications of the S7-300 modules) 24v dc power supply the following table shows you what you must observe in connection with the 24v dc power supply. function measures to take buildings external lightning protection install lightning pro- tection ( lihti 24v dc power supply cables, signal cables internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning conductors). 24 v power supply safe (electrical) extra-low voltage isolation
wiring 4-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 protection against the effects of external electrical interference the following table will show you what you must do to protect your programmable controller against electrical interference or faults. function make sure that ... all plants and systems in which the S7-300 is installed a protective conductor is connected to the plant or system to divert electromagnetic interference. supply, signal and bus cables the conductor routing and installation is correct. (see section 4.1.7 and 4.1.8) signal and bus cables a cable break or conductor break cannot result in undefined plant or system states. rules relating to S7-300 power consumption and power loss the S7-300 modules draw the power they need from the backplane bus and, if required, from an external load power supply. s the power consumption of all the signal modules from the backplane bus must not exceed the current the cpu can deliver to the backplane bus. s the ps 307 power supply is dependent on the power consumption from the 24v load power supply; this is made up of the total power consumption of the signal modules and all other connected loads. s the power loss of all the components in a cabinet must not exceed the maximum thermal rating of the cabinet. tip: when establishing the required dimensions of the cabinet, ensure that the temperature inside the cabinet does not exceed the permissible 60 _ c even where external temperatures are high. you will find the values for the power consumption and power loss of a module under the technical specifications of the relevant modules.
wiring 4-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1.2 configuring the S7-300 process i/os this section contains information concerning the overall configuration of an S7-300 system with a grounded incoming supply (tn-s system). the following aspects are covered: s circuit-breaking devices, short-circuit and overload protection to vde 0100 and vde 0113 s load power supplies and load circuits definition: grounded supply in a grounded incoming supply system, the neutral is grounded. a single fault to ground or a grounded part of the plant causes the protective devices to trip. components and protective measures a number of components and protective measures are prescribed for a plant. the type of components and the degree of compulsion pertaining to the protective measures will depend on the vde specification applicable to your particular plant. the following table refers to figure 4-1 on page 4-5. table 4-1 vde specifications for configuring a plc system compare ... refer to figure 4-1 vde 0100 vde 0113 disconnecting devices for control systems, sensors and actuators ... part 460: main switch ... part 1: disconnector short-circuit and over- load protection: in groups for sensors and actuators ... part 725: single-pole fu- sing of circuits ... part 1: s in the case of a grounded secondary circuit: provide single-pole protection s otherwise: provide all-pole protection load power supply for ac load circuits with more than five electro- magnetic devices galvanic isolation by transformer recommended galvanic isolation by transformer mandatory
wiring 4-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 features of load power supplies the load power supply feeds input and output circuits (load circuits), as well as sensors and actuators. the characteristic features of load power supplies required in specific applications are listed in the following table. characteristics of the load power supply mandatory for ... remarks protective separa- tion modules that have to be supplied with v 60v dc or v 25v ac the ps 307 power supplies and the sie- mens load power supplies of the 6ep1 series have these characteristics 24v dc load circuits output voltage tole- rances: 20.4 v to 28.8 v 40.8 v to 57.6 v 51 v to 72 v 24v dc load circuits 48v dc load circuits 60v dc load circuits if the output voltage tolerances are ex- ceeded, we recommend you fit a back- up capacitor rating: 200 m f per 1a load current (in the case of full-wave rectifica- tion). rule: ground load circuits load circuits should be grounded. the common reference potential (ground) guarantees full functionality. provide a detachable connection to the protective conductor on the load power supply (terminal l- or m) or on the isolating transformer (figure 4-1, ). in the event of power distribution faults, this makes it easier to localize ground faults. S7-300 grounding concept in the S7-300 grounding concept, a distinction is drawn between the cpu 312 ifm and the other cpus. s cpu 312 ifm : with the cpu 312 ifm, you can only implement a grounded configuration. the functional ground is connected to the chassis ground internally in cpu 312 ifm (see section 8.4.1). s cpu 313/314/314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp/318-2: if you use the S7-300 with one of these cpus on a grounded supply, you should also ground the reference potential of the S7-300. the reference potential is grounded if the connection between the m terminal and the functional ground terminal on the cpus is in place (factory setting of the cpu).
wiring 4-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 S7-300 in the overall configuration figure 4-1 shows the S7-300 in the overall configuration (load power supply and grounding concept) supplied from a tn-s system. note: the arrangement of the power supply connections shown does not reflect the actual physical arrangement; this has been done to improve clarity. ground bus in cabinet n m l1 l + m ps cpu m p l1 l2 l3 n load circuit 24 to 230v ac for ac modules 5 to 60v dc load circuit for non-isolated dc modules 5 to 60v dc load circuit for isolated dc modules cabinet ac ac ac dc ac dc signal modules low-voltage distribution for example, tn-s system (3 400 v) pe sm rail figure 4-1 signal modules operated on a grounded incoming supply
wiring 4-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 S7-300 with load power supply from the ps 307 figure 4-2 shows the S7-300 in the overall configuration (load power supply and grounding concept) in a tn-s power system environment. apart from powering the cpu, the ps 307 also supplies the load current for the 24v dc modules. note: the arrangement of the power supply connections does not reflect the actual physical arrangement; this has been done to improve clarity. n m l1 l + m ps cpu m p l1 l2 l3 n 24v dc load circuit for dc modules ground bus in cabinet cabinet signal modules low-voltage distribution for example, tn-s system (3 400 v) pe sm rail figure 4-2 signal modules powered from the ps 307
wiring 4-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1.3 S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential if you install the S7-300 with grounded reference potential, interference currents that might occur are discharged to the protective conductor. s in the case of cpus 313/314/314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/316-2dp/318-2, via a jumper inserted between terminal m and functional ground (see figure 4-3) s in the case of the cpu 312 ifm, these terminals are connected internally (see section 8.4.1). terminal connection model figure 4-3 shows the configuration of an S7-300 with cpu 313/314/314 ifm/315/ 315-2 dp/316-2 dp/318-2 with grounded reference potential. if you want to ground the reference potential, you must not remove the jumper on the cpu between the m terminal and functional ground . m l + m m 47 nf 1 m w ground bus removable jumper removable jumper figure 4-3 S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential 4.1.4 S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference potential (not cpu 312 ifm) if you install the S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential, any interference current is discharged to the protective conductor via an rc network integrated in cpus 313/314/314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/ 316-2 dp/318-2 (see figure 4-4). application in plants covering large areas, it may be necessary to configure the S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential for ground fault monitoring purposes, for example. this is the case, for example, in the chemical industry and in power stations.
wiring 4-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 terminal connection model figure 4-4 shows the configuration of an S7-300 (not with cpu 312 ifm) with ungrounded reference potential. if you do not want to ground the reference potential, you must remove the jumper on the cpu between the m terminal and functional ground . if the jumper is not in place, the S7-300's reference potential is connected internally to the protective conductor over an rc network and the rail. this discharges radio-frequency interference current and precludes static charges. m l + m m 47 nf 1 m w ground bus figure 4-4 S7-300 configuration with ungrounded reference potential power supply units in the case of power supply units, make sure that the secondary winding has no connection to the protective conductor. we recommend the use of the ps 307 power supply module. filtering the 24v dc supply if you supply the cpu from a battery without grounding the reference potential, you must filter the 24 v dc supply. use an interference suppression device from siemens, for example, b84102-k40. insulation monitoring if dangerous plant conditions can arise as a result of double faults, you must provide some form of insulation monitoring.
wiring 4-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1.5 S7-300 configuration with isolated modules isolation between... in configurations with isolated modules, the reference potentials of the control circuit (m internal ) and load circuit (m external ) are electrically isolated (see figure 4-5). application you use isolated modules for the following: s all ac load circuits s dc load circuits with separate reference potential examples of load circuits with separate reference potential: dc load circuits whose sensors have different reference potentials (for example if grounded sensors are located at some considerable distance from the control system and no equipotential bonding is possible) dc load circuits whose positive pole (l+) is grounded (battery circuits). isolated modules and grounding concept you can use isolated modules irrespective of whether the reference potential of the control system is grounded or not.
wiring 4-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 potentials in a configuration with isolated modules n m l1 l + m ps cpu m p l1 n 24v dc load current supply m ext l + u int m int data l1 n di do pe 230v ac load current supply ground bus in cabinet figure 4-5 potentials in a configuration with isolated modules
wiring 4-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1.6 configuration of an S7-300 with non-isolated modules potentials in a configuration with non-isolated modules figure 4-6 shows the potentials of an S7-300 configuration with grounded reference potential with the non-isolated analog input/output module sm 334; ai 4/ao 2 8/8bit. for this analog input/output module, you must connect one of the m ana grounds with the chassis ground of the cpu. l+ n m l1 l+ m ps cpu m p l1 n 24v dc load power supply u int m int data 4ai/2ao pe 1 mm 2 m ana ground bus in the cabinet m ext v a ++ d a a d figure 4-6 potentials in a configuration with the non-isolated sm 334 analog input/output module; ai 4/ao 2 8/8bit 4.1.7 cable/wiring routing inside buildings rules for emc cable/wiring routing inside buildings (inside and outside cabinets), clearances must be observed between groups of different cables to achieve the necessary electromagnetic compatibility (emc). table 4-2 provides you with information on the general rules governing clearances to enable you to choose the right cables.
wiring 4-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 how to read the table to find out how to run two cables of different types, proceed as follows: 1. look up the type of the first cable in column 1 (cables for ...). 2. look up the type of the second cable in the corresponding field in column 2 (and cables for ...). 3. read off the guidelines to be observed from column 3 (run ...). table 4-2 cabling inside buildings cables for ... and cables for ... run ... bus signals, shielded (sinec l1, profibus) data signals, shielded (programming devices, operator panels, printers, counter inputs, etc.) analog signals, shielded direct voltage ( v 60 v), unshielded process signals ( v 25 v), shielded alternating voltage ( v 25 v), unshielded monitors (coaxial cable) bus signals, shielded (sinec l1, profibus) data signals, shielded (programming devices, operator panels, printers, counter inputs, etc.) analog signals, shielded direct voltage ( v 60 v), unshielded process signals ( v 25 v), shielded alternating voltage ( v 25 v), unshielded monitors (coaxial cable) in common bundles or cable ducts direct voltage ( u 60 v and v 400 v), unshielded alternating voltage ( u 25 v and v 400 v), unshielded in separate bundles or cable ducts (no minimum clearance necessary) direct and alternating voltages ( u 400 v), unshielded inside cabinets: in separate bundles or cable ducts (no minimum clearance necessary) outside cabinets: on separate cable racks with a clearance of at least 10 cm (3.93 in.)
wiring 4-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 4-2 cable/wiring routing inside buildings, continued cables for ... and cables for ... run ... direct voltage ( u 60 v and v 400 v), unshielded alternating voltage ( u 25 v and v 400 v), unshielded bus signals, shielded (sinec l1, profibus) data signals, shielded (programming devices, ops, printers, count signals, etc.) analog signals, shielded direct voltage ( v 60 v), unshielded process ( v 25 v), shielded alternating voltage ( v 25 v), unshielded monitors (coaxial cable) in separate bundles or cable ducts (no minimum clearance necessary) direct voltage ( u 60 v and v 400 v), unshielded alternating voltage ( u 25 v and v 400 v), unshielded in common bundles or cable ducts direct and alternating voltages ( u 400 v), unshielded inside cabinets: in separate bundles or cable ducts (no minimum clearance necessary) outside cabinets: on separate cable racks with a clearance of at least 10 cm (3.93 in.)
wiring 4-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 4-2 cable/wiring routing inside buildings, continued cables for ... and cables for ... run ... direct and alternating voltages ( u 400 v), unshielded bus signals, shielded (sinec l1, profibus) data signals, shielded (programming devices, ops, printers, count signals, etc.) analog signals, shielded direct voltage ( v 60 v), unshielded process ( v 25 v), shielded alternating voltage ( v 25 v), unshielded monitors (coaxial cable) inside cabinets: in separate bundles or cable ducts (no minimum clearance necessary) outside cabinets: on separate cable racks with a clearance of at least 10 cm (3.93 in.) direct voltage ( u 60 v and v 400 v), unshielded alternating voltage ( u 25 v and v 400 v), unshielded direct and alternating voltages ( u 400 v), unshielded direct and alternating voltages ( u 400 v), unshielded in common bundles or cable ducts sinec h1 sinec h1 in common bundles or cable ducts others in separate bundles or cable ducts with a clearance of at least 50 cm (19.65 in.)
wiring 4-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.1.8 cable/wiring routing outside buildings rules for emc cable/wiring routing when installing cables outside buildings, the same emc rules apply as for inside buildings. the following also applies: s run cables on metal cable supports. s establish an electrical connection between the joints in the cable supports. s ground the cable supports. s if necessary, provide adequate equipotential bonding between the various items of equipment connected. s take the necessary (internal and external) lightning protection and grounding measures in as far as they are applicable to your particular application (see below). rules for lightning protection outside buildings run your cables either: s in metal conduits grounded at both ends, or s in concrete cable ducts with continuous end-to-end armoring. overvoltage protection equipment an individual appraisal of the entire plant is necessary before any lightning protection measures are taken (see section 4.2). 4.1.9 protecting digital output modules from inductive overvoltage integrated overvoltage protection the digital output modules of the S7-300 have integral surge protectors. surge voltages occur when inductive loads (for example, relay coils and contactors) are switched off.
wiring 4-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 additional overvoltage protection inductive loads should only be fitted with supplementary surge protectors in the following cases: s if simatic output circuits can be switched off by means of additionally installed contacts (e.g. relay emergency stop contacts) s if the inductive loads are not driven by simatic modules note: ask the supplier of the inductances how the various overvoltage protection devices should be rated. example: figure 4-7 shows an output circuit that makes supplementary overvoltage protection necessary. contact in the output circuit for example, emergency stop switch inductance requires suppressor circuit (see figures 4-8 and 4-9). d figure 4-7 relay contact for emergency stop in the output circuit suppressor circuit with dc-operated coils with diodes and zener diodes dc-operated coils are connected with diodes or zener diodes. + - + - with diodes with zener diodes figure 4-8 suppressor circuit with dc-operated coils with diodes and zener diodes
wiring 4-19 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 suppressor circuit with diodes/zener diodes diode/zener diode circuits have the following characteristics: s the overvoltages induced on circuit interruption are completely suppressed/zener diode has a higher cut-off voltage. s they have a high time delay (six to nine times higher than without a diode circuit)/zener diode interrupts switch faster than a diode circuit. suppressor circuit with ac-operated coils ac-operated coils are connected with varistors or rc elements. with varistor with rc element ~ ~ ~ ~ figure 4-9 suppressor circuit with ac-operated coils suppressor circuit with varistors suppressor circuits with varistors have the following characteristics: s the amplitude of the switching overvoltage is limited, but not damped s the wavefront steepness remains the same s very short time delay suppressor circuit with rc elements suppressor circuits with rc elements have the following characteristics: s the amplitude and wavefront steepness of the switching overvoltage are reduced s short time delay.
wiring 4-20 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.2 lightning protection section contents page 4.2.1 lightning protection zone concept 4-21 4.2.2 rules for the transition between lightning protection zones 0 1 4-23 4.2.3 rules for the transition between lightning protection zones 1 2 and greater 4-25 4.2.4 sample circuit for overvoltage protection of networked S7-300s 4-28 reference literature the solutions given are based on the lightning protection zone concept described in the iec 1312-1 aprotection against lempo. overview failures are very often the result of overvoltages caused by: s atmospheric discharge or s electrostatic discharge. we will begin by showing you what the theory of overvoltage protection is based on: the lightning protection zones concept. at the end of this section, you will find rules for the transitions between the individual lightning protection zones. note this section can only provide information on the protection of a programmable controller against overvoltages. however, complete protection against overvoltage is guaranteed only if the whole surrounding building is designed to provide protection against overvoltages. this applies especially to constructional measures for the building at the planning stage. if you wish to obtain detailed information on overvoltage protection, we therefore recommend you to address your siemens contact or a company specialized in lightning protection.
wiring 4-21 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.2.1 lightning protection zone concept the principle of the lightning protection zone concept the principle of the lightning protection zone concept states that the volume to be protected, for example, a manufacturing hall, is subdivided into lightning protection zones in accordance with emc guidelines (see figure 4-10). the individual lightning protection zones are made up of: the outer lightning protection of the building (field side) lightning protection zone 0 shielding s buildings lightning protection zone 1 s rooms and/or lightning protection zone 2 s devices lightning protection zone 3 effects of the lightning strike direct lightning strikes occur in lightning protection zone 0. the lightning strike creates high-energy electromagnetic fields which can be reduced or removed from one lightning protection zone to the next by suitable lightning protection elements/measures. overvoltage in lightning protection zones 1 and higher, surges can result from switching operations and interference.
wiring 4-22 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 schematic of the lightning protection zones figure 4-10 shows a schematic of the lightning protection zone concept for a free-standing building. lightning protection zone 0 (field side) lightning prot. zone 2 lightning protection zone 3 device power cable lightning protection zone 1 building outer lightning shield (steel armouring) room shield (steel armouring) device shield (metal housing) metallic part non electrical wire data cable lightening protection equipotential bonding local equipotential bonding internal line (metallic) protection figure 4-10 lightning protection zones of a building principle of the transitions between lightning protection zones at the transitions between the lightning protection zones, you must take measures to prevent surges being conducted further. the lightning protection zone concept also states that all cables at the transitions between the lightning protection zones that can carry lightning stroke current (!) must be included in the lightning protection equipotential bonding. lines that can carry lightning stroke current include: s metal pipelines (for example, water, gas and heat) s power cables (for example, line voltage, 24 v supply) and s data cables (for example, bus cable).
wiring 4-23 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.2.2 rules for the transition between lightning protection zones 0 1 rule for the transition 0 1 (lightning protection equipotential bonding) the following measures are suitable for lightning protection equipotential bonding at the transition between lightning protection zones 0 1: s use grounded, spiraled, current-conducting metal strips or metal braiding, for example, nycy or a2y(k)y, as a cable shield at the start and end, and s lay cable in continuous metal pipes that are grounded at the start and end, or in ducts of armored concrete with continuous armoring or on closed metal cable racks grounded at the start and end, or s use fiber optic cables instead of lightning stroke current-carrying cables. additional measures if you cannot take the measures listed above, you must install a high-voltage protector at the 0 1 transition with a corresponding lightning conductor. table 4-3 contains the components you can use for high-voltage protection of your plant. table 4-3 high-voltage protection of cables using surge protection components no. cables for ... ... with the following at transi- tion 0 1 order no. 1 s 3-phase tn-c system 3 dehnport lightning conductors phase l1/l2/l3 to pen 5 sd 7 028* s 3-phase tn-s and tt system 4 dehnport lightning conductors phase l1/l2/l3/n to pe 5 sd 7 028* s ac tn-l, tn-s, tt system 2 dehnport lightning conductors phase l1 + n to pe 5 sd 7 028* 2 24v dc power supply 1 kt lightning conductor type a d 24 v dsn: 919 253
wiring 4-24 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 4-3 high-voltage protection of cables using surge protection components, continued no. order no. ... with the following at transi- tion 0 1 cables for ... 3 bus cable s mpi, rs 485 s up to 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type are 8 v - dsn: 919 232 s over 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type ahfd 5 v - dsn: 919 270 s rs 232 (v.24) s per core pair 1 kt lightning conductor type are 15 v - dsn: 919 231 4 inputs/outputs of digital modules and power supply s 24v dc 1 kt lightning conductor type ad 24 v - dsn: 919 253 s 120/230v ac 2 dehnguard 150 surge arresters 900 603* 5 inputs/outputs of analog modules s up to 12 v +/ 1 kt lightning conductor type ale 15 v - dsn: 919 220 s up to 24 v +/ 1 kt lightning conductor type ale 48 v - dsn: 919 227 s up to 48 v +/ 1 kt lightning conductor type ale 60 v - dsn: 919 222 * you can order these components direct from dehn + s?hne gmbh + co. kg elektrotechnische fabrik hans-dehn-str. 1 d-92318 neumarkt federal republic of germany
wiring 4-25 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.2.3 rules for the transitions between 1 2 and greater lightning protection zones rules for 1 2 and greater transitions (local equipotential bonding) the following applies to all 1 2 and greater lightning protection zone transitions: s set up local equipotential bonding at each subsequent lightning protection zone transition. s include all cables (also metal conduits, for example) in the local equipotential bonding at all subsequent lightning protection zone transitions. s include all metal installations located within the lightning protection zone in the local equipotential bonding (for example, metal part within lightning protection zone 2 at transition 1 2). additional measures we recommend low-voltage protection: s for all 1 2 and greater lightning protection zone transitions and s for all cables that run within a lightning protection zone and are longer than 100 m lightning protection element for the 24v dc power supply you must use only the kt lightning conductor, type ad 24 v simatic for the 24v dc power supply of the S7-300. all other surge protection components do not meet the required tolerance range of 20.4 v to 28.8 v of the S7-300's power supply. lightning conductor for signal modules you can use standard surge protection components for the digital input/output modules. however, please note that these only permit a maximum of 1.15 v nom = 27.6 v for a rated voltage of 24v dc. if the tolerance of your 24v dc power supply is higher, use the surge protection components for 48v dc nominal voltage. you can also use the kt lightning conductor, type ad 24 v simatic. however, this can result in the following restrictions: s digital inputs: an increased input current can flow in the case of negative input voltages. s digital outputs: the release time of contactors can increase significantly.
wiring 4-26 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 low-voltage protection elements for 1 2 we recommend the surge protection components listed in table 4-4 for the interfaces between lightning protection zones 1 2. you must use these low-voltage protection elements for the S7-300 in order to meet the conditions for the ce mark. table 4-4 low-voltage protection for lightning protection zone 1 2 no. cables for ... ... with the following at transi- tion 1 2 order no. 1 s 3-phase tn-c system 3 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 s 3-phase tn-s and tt system 4 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 s ac tn-l, tn-s, tt system 2 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 2 24v dc power supply 1 kt lightning conductor type a d 24 v dsn: 919 253 3 bus cable s mpi, rs 485 s up to 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type are 8 v - dsn: 919 232 s over 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type ahfd 5 v - dsn: 919 270 s rs 232 (v.24) s per core pair 1 kt lightning conductor type are 15 v - dsn: 919 231 4 inputs/outputs of digital modules s 24v dc 1 kt lightning conductor type ad 24 v - dsn: 919 253 s 120/230v ac 2 dehnguard 150 surge arresters 900 603* 5 inputs of analog modules s up to 12 v +/ 1 kt ald 12 v terminal block on insulated rail dsn: 919 216 * you can order these components direct from dehn + s?hne gmbh + co. kg elektrotechnische fabrik hans-dehn-str. 1 d-92318 neumarkt federal republic of germany
wiring 4-27 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 low-voltage protection elements for 2 3 we recommend the surge protection components listed in table 4-5 for the transitions between lightning protection zones 2 3. you must use these low-voltage protection elements for the S7-300 in order to meet the conditions for the ce mark. table 4-5 low-voltage protection for lightning protection zone 2 3 no. cables for ... ... with the following at transi- tion 2 3 order no. 1 s 3-phase tn-c system 3 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 s 3-phase tn-s and tt system 4 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 s ac tn-l, tn-s, tt system 2 dehnguard 275 surge arresters 900 600* 5 sd 7 030 2 24v dc power supply 1 kt lightning conductor type a d 24 v dsn: 919 253 3 bus cable s mpi, rs 485 s up to 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type are 8 v - dsn: 919 232 s over 500 kbps 1 kt lightning conductor type ahfd 5 v - dsn: 919 270 s rs 232 (v.24) s per core pair 1 kt lightning conductor type are 15 v - dsn: 919 231 4 inputs of digital modules s 24v dc 1 terminal block fdk 60 v on insulated rail dsn: 919 997 s 120/230v ac 2 dehnguard 150 surge arresters 900 603* 5 outputs of analog modules s up to 12 v +/ 1 terminal block type fdk 12 v on an insulated rail, which is connected to m of the module supply dsn: 919 999 * you can order these components direct from dehn + s?hne gmbh + co. kg elektrotechnische fabrik hans-dehn-str. 1 d-92318 neumarkt federal republic of germany
wiring 4-28 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.2.4 sample circuit for overvoltage protection of networked S7-300s components in figure 4-11 table 4-6 explains the consecutive numbers in figure 4-11: table 4-6 example of a configuration fulfilling lightning protection requirements (legend for figure 4-11) no. from figure 4-11 components description 1 dehnport lightning conductors, 2 - 4 depending on mains system order no.: 900 100* high-voltage protection against direct lightning strikes and surges as of transition 0 1 2 2 dehnguard 275 surge arresters, order no.: 900 600* high-voltage surge protection at transition 1 2 3 s in the spur line 1 intermediate adapter type fs 9e-pb order no.: dsn 924 017 low-voltage surge protection for rs 485 interfaces at transition 1 2 s in the spur line 1 standard rail 35 mm with connecting cable type sd-9-pb/s-kb order no.: dsn 924 064 4 digital modules: kt lightning conductor, type ad 24 v simatic analog modules: kt lightning conductor, type are 12 v low-voltage surge protection at inputs and outputs of the signal modules at transition 1 2 5 shielding the bus cable: ??? copper plate shielding clip 6 equipotential bonding cable 16 mm 2 7 kt lightning conductor, type ahfd, for building entry point order no.: dsn 919 270 low-voltage surge protection for rs 485 interfaces at transition 0 1
wiring 4-29 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 interconnection example figure 4-11 gives an example of how to wire connect networked S7-300s in order to achieve effective protection against surges: cpu sv 10 mm 2 pe cabinet 1 l1 l2 l3 n pe lightning protection zone 0, field side lightning protection zone 1 lightning protect. zone 2 sm mpi cpu sv 10 mm 2 pe cabinet 2 sm mpi lightning protect. zone 2
figure 4-11 example of the interconnection of networked S7-300s
wiring 4-30 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.3 wiring section contents page 4.3.1 wiring rules 4-30 4.3.2 wiring the power supply module and cpu 4-32 4.3.3 wiring the front connectors of the signal modules 4-35 4.3.4 connecting shielded cables using the shield contact element 4-39 prerequisite you have already installed the S7-300 as described in chapter 2. 4.3.1 wiring rules table 4-7 wiring rules for the power supply and cpu wiring rules for... power supply and cpu connectable cable cross-sections for rigid cables no connectable cable ti without wire end ferrule 0.25 to 2.5 mm 2 cross-sections for flexible cables with wire end ferrule 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 number of cables per terminal connection 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm 2 (total) in a common wire end ferrule maximum outside diameter of the insulation ? 3.8 mm length of stripped lines without insulating collar 11 mm with insulating collar 11 mm wire end ferrules to din 46228 without insulating collar version a, 10 to 12 mm long with insulating collar version e, up to 12 mm long
wiring 4-31 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 4-8 wiring rules for module front connectors wiring rules for... module front connectors (spring terminal and screw - type (s pr i ng t erm i na l an d s crew- t ype terminal) 20-pin 40-pin connectable cable cross-sections for rigid cables no no connectable cable ti without wire end ferrule 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 0.75 mm 2 cross-sections for flexible cables with wire end ferrule 0.25 to 1.5 mm 2 0.25 to 0.75 mm 2 potential infeed: 1.5 mm 2 number of cables per terminal connection 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm 2 (total) in a common wire end ferrule 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 0.75 mm 2 (total) in a common wire end ferrule maximum outside diameter of the insulation ? 3.1 mm max. qty. 20 ? 2.0 mm max. qty. 40 ? 3.1 mm max. qty. 20 length of stripped lines without insulating collar 6 mm 6 mm with insulating collar 6 mm 6 mm wire end ferrules to din 46228 without insulating collar version a, 5 to 7 mm long version a, 5 to 7 mm long with insulating collar version e, up to 6 mm long version e, up to 6 mm long
wiring 4-32 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.3.2 wiring the power supply module and cpu power cables use flexible cables with a cross-section of between 0.25 and 2.5 mm 2 to wire the power supply. if you use only one cable per connection, you don't need an end ferrule. power connector (not for cpu 312 ifm) use the power connector when wiring the ps 307 power supply module to the cpu. the power connector comes with the power supply module. wiring the cpu 312 ifm the ps 307 power supply module and the cpu 312 ifm are wired via the front connector of the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm (see section 8.4.1). you therefore cannot use the power connector for the cpu 312 ifm. other 24v connections above the power connector on the ps 307 power supply there are still a number of free 24v connections for powering the i/o modules.
wiring 4-33 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 wiring with the power connector to wire the ps 307 power supply module and cpu, proceed as follows (see figure 4-12). ! warning accidental contact with live conductors is possible, if the power supply module and any additional load power supplies are switched on. make sure the S7-300 is absolutely dead before doing any wiring! 1. open the front doors of the ps 307 power supply and cpu. 2. undo the strain-relief assembly on the ps 307. 3. strip the insulation from the power cable (230v/120v), and connect it to the ps 307. 4. screw the strain-relief assembly tight. 5. cpu 312 ifm: strip the insulation off the power cable of the cpu 312 ifm, and connect it to the ps 307 an. cpu 313/314/314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp/318-2: insert the power connector, and screw it in tightly. 6. close the front doors. 0.5 to 0.8 nm power connector 230 v/120 v strain-relief assembly 4 figure 4-12 wiring the power supply module and cpu to the power connector
wiring 4-34 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 setting the power supply to the required mains voltage check to see that the voltage selector switch on the power supply module is set to your local mains voltage. this switch is always factory-set to 230 v on the ps 307. to select another mains voltage, do the following: 1. pry the cover off with a screwdriver. 2. set the selector to your mains voltage. 3. replace the cover. 1 2 figure 4-13 setting the mains voltage for the ps 307
wiring 4-35 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.3.3 wiring the front connectors of the signal modules cables you can use flexible cables with cross-sections as in table 4-8 on page 4-31. you do not need wire end ferrules. if you use wire end ferrules, only use those listed in table 4-8 on page 4-31. integrated inputs/outputs you wire the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm also via the front connector as described in this section. if you use the possible digital inputs of the cpus for the special functions, you wire these inputs with shielded cables via a shield contact element (see section 4.3.4). this also applies when wiring the analog inputs/outputs of the cpu 314 ifm. types of front connector you can order the 20- and 40-pin front connectors with spring or screw-type terminals. you will find the order numbers in appendix f. spring terminals to wire the front connector using spring terminals, simply insert the screwdriver vertically into the opening with the red opening mechanism, put the cable into the correct terminal, and remove the screwdriver. tip: there is a separate opening for test probes up to 2 mm in diameter to the left of the opening for the screwdriver. wiring the front connector wire the screw-type front connector as follows: 1. prepare the connector for wiring. 2. wire the connector. 3. prepare the module for operation. these three steps are described on the following pages.
wiring 4-36 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 preparing the connector for wiring. ! warning accidental contact with live conductors is possible if the power supply module and any additional load power supplies are switched on. make sure the S7-300 is absolutely dead before doing any wiring! 1. open the front door. 2. place the front connector in the wiring position. to do this, push the front connector into the signal module until it snaps into place. the front connector still protrudes from the module in this position. an advantage of the wiring position is that it makes wiring easier; in the wiring position a wired front connector has no contact with the module. 2 1 figure 4-14 bringing the front connector into the wiring position 3. strip the insulation off the cables (see table 4-8 on page 4-31) 4. do you want to use end ferrules? if so: press the end ferrules and the cables together
wiring 4-37 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 wiring the front connector table 4-9 wiring the front connector step 20-pin front connector 40-pin front connector 1. thread the cable strain-relief assembly into the front connector. 2. do you want to bring the cables out at the bottom of the module? if so: start with terminal 20, and wire the terminals in the following order: terminal 20, 19, ... 1. starting at terminal 40 or 20, connect up the terminals in alternating order, that is terminals 39, 19, 38, 18 etc., down to terminals 21 and 1. if not: start with terminal 1, and wire the terminals in the following order: terminal 1, 2, ... 20. starting at terminal 1 or 21, connect up the terminals in alternating order, that is terminals 2, 22, 3, 23 etc., up to terminals 20 and 40. 3. with screw-type terminals: also tighten the screws of any terminals that are not wired. 4. attach the cable strain-relief assembly around the cable and the front connector. 5. pull the cable strain-relief assembly tight. push the retainer on the strain-relief assembly in to the left; this will improve utilization of the available space. 1 2 0.5 to 0.8 nm 1 2 4 3 0.4 to 0.7 nm
wiring 4-38 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 preparing the signal module for operation table 4-10 preparing the signal module for operation step 20-pin front connector 40-pin front connector 1. press down the unlocking button on the top of the module and, at the same time, push the front connector into its operating position on the module. when the front connector reaches its operating position, the unlocking button will snap back into the locking position. tighten screws to bring front connector to its operating position. note: when the front connector is put in its operating position, a front connector encoding device engages in the front connector. the front connector then only fits this type of module (see section 7.2). 2. close the front door. 3. enter the addresses for identifying the individual channels on the labeling strip. 4. slide the labeling strip into the guides on the front door. 1a 1 2 1 2 0.4 to 0.7 nm
wiring 4-39 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 4.3.4 connecting shielded cables via a shield contact element application using the shield contact element you can easily connect all the shielded cables of s7 modules to ground by directly connecting the shield contact element to the rail. also for the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm you can also use the shield contact element for wiring the integral inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm, when using inputs for the special functions or when wiring the analog inputs/outputs for the cpu 314 ifm. design of the shield contact element the shield contact element consists of the following parts: s a fixing bracket with two bolts for attaching the element to the rail (order no.: 6es5 390-5aa00-0aa0) and s the shield terminals depending on the cable cross-sections used, you must use the following shield terminal: table 4-11 assignment of cable cross-sections and terminal elements cable with shield diameter shield terminal order no.: 2 cables with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm (0.08 to 0.23 in.) each 6es7 390-5ab00-0aa0 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm (0.12 to 0.31 in.) 6es7 390-5ba00-0aa0 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm (0.16 to 0.51 in.) 6es7 390-5ca00-0aa0 the shield contact element is 80 mm (3.15 in.) wide with space for two rows each with 4 shield terminals.
wiring 4-40 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 installing the shield contact element install the shield contact element as follows: 1. push the two bolts of the fixing bracket into the guide on the underside of the rail. position the fixing bracket under the modules to be wired. 2. bolt the fixing bracket tight to the rail. 3. a slotted web is arranged at the bottom side of the terminal element. place the shield terminal at this position onto edge a of the fixing bracket (see figure 4-15). press the shield terminals down and swing them into the desired position. you can attach up to four terminal elements on each of the two rows of the shield contact element. shield terminal fixing bracket edge a figure 4-15 configuration of two signal modules with shield contact element
wiring 4-41 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 attaching cables you can only attach one or two shielded cables per shield terminal (see figure 4-16 and table 4-11). the cable is connected by its bare cable shield. there must be at least 20 mm (0.78 in.) of bare cable shield. if you need more than 4 shield terminals, start wiring at the rear row of the shield contact element. tip: use a sufficiently long cable between the shield terminal and the front connector. you can thus remove the front connector without the need to also remove the shield terminal. 1 2 2 shield must lie under the shield terminal figure 4-16 attaching shielded 2-wire cables to a shield contact element
wiring 4-42 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
5-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 networking similar structure the structure of an mpi subnet is basically the same as a profibus subnet. that means the same rules and the same components are used to set up the subnet. the only exception arises if you set a transmission rate > 1.5 mbps in a profibus subnet. in this case, you will need other components. special reference is made to these components where relevant in this documentation. since the structure of an mpi subnet does not differ from that of a profibus subnet, general reference is made in the following sections to configuring a subnet. in this chapter section contents page 5.1 configuring a subnet 5-2 5.2 network components 5-15 5
networking 5-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.1 configuring a subnet in this chapter section contents page 5.1.1 prerequisites 5-2 5.1.2 rules for configuring a subnet 5-5 5.1.3 cable lengths 5-12 device = node declaration: in the following, all devices that you connect in an mpi subnet are called nodes. 5.1.1 prerequisites mpi/profibus addresses to ensure that all nodes can communicate with one another, you must allocate them an address before networking: s an ampi addresso and a ahighest mpi addresso in the mpi subnet s a aprofibus addresso and a ahighest profibus addresso in a profibus subnet. set these mpi/profibus addresses individually for each node using the programming device (also on the slave switch in the case of some profibus-dp slaves). note the rs 485 repeater is not allocated an ampi addresso or a aprofibus addresso.
networking 5-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 5-1 permissible mpi/profibus addresses mpi addresses profibus addresses 0 to 126 0 to 125 of these, the following are reserved: 0 for the pg 1 for the op 2 for the cpu of these, the following are reserved: 0 for the pg rules for the mpi/profibus addresses observe the following rules before assigning mpi/profibus addresses: s all mpi/profibus addresses in a subnet must be different. s the highest mpi/profibus address must be w the largest actual mpi/profibus address and be identical for each node. (exception: if the programming device is connected to several nodes; see section 6.3.2). differences in the case of mpi addresses of cps/fms in an S7-300 please note the following peculiarities and differences when using cps/fms with a separate mpi address dependent on the cpu being used. cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp: table 5-2 mpi addresses of cps/fms in an S7-300 (with the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp) options example example: S7-300 with a cpu and 2 cps in a configuration. the following 2 possibilities exist for the assignment of mpi addresses of the cp/fm in one configuration: cpu cp cp option 1 the cpu accepts the mpi addresses of the cps you set in step 7 . as of step 7 v 4.02 (see section 11.2) mpi addr. mpi addr. axo mpi addr. azo option 2 the cpu automatically establishes the mpi addresses of the cps in their configuration in accordance with the mpi addr. pattern. cpu mpi addr.+1 mpi addr.+2 mpi addr. mpi addr.+1 mpi addr.+2
networking 5-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 318-2 cpu 318-2 cp cp an S7-300 with the cpu 318-2 only occupies one mpi address in the mpi subnet. mpi addr. recommendation for mpi addresses reserve the mpi address a0o for a service programming device and a1o for a service op that will be connected temporarily to the mpi if required. this means, that you must assign different addresses to programming devices/ops that are integrated in the mpi subnet. recommendation for the mpi address of the cpu in the event of replacement or servicing: reserve the mpi address a2o for a cpu. you thus prevent double mpi addresses occurring after connection of a cpu with default settings to the mpi subnet (for example, when replacing a cpu). this means that you must assign an mpi address greater than a2o to the cpus in the mpi subnet. recommendation for profibus addresses reserve the profibus address a0o for a service programming device that may subsequently be temporarily connected to the profibus subnet if required. allocate other profibus addresses to the programming devices integrated in the profibus subnet.
networking 5-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.1.2 rules for configuring a subnet in this section this chapter describes how to configure a subnet and provides examples. segment a segment is a bus cable between two terminating resistors. a segment can contain up to 32 nodes. a segment is further limited by the permissible cable length, which depends on the transmission rate (see section 5.1.3). rules on connecting the nodes of a subnet s before you interconnect the individual nodes of the subnet you must assign the mpi address and the highest mpi address or the aprofibus addresso and the ahighest profibus addresso to each node (except for rs 485 repeater). mark all the nodes in a subnet by putting their address on their housings. in this way, you can always see which node has been assigned which address in your system. for this purpose, each cpu comes with an enclosed sheet of address labels. s connect all nodes in the subnet ain a rowo; that is, integrate the stationary programming devices and ops direct in the subnet. connect only those programming devices/ops that are required for commissioning or maintenance via spur lines to the subnet. note as of 3 mbps, use only bus connectors with the order no. 6es7 972-0b. 1 0-0xa0 or 6es7 972-0b. 4 0-0xa0 to connect the nodes. (see section 5.2) as of 3 mbps, use only the programming device connecting cable with the order no. 6es7 901-4bd00-0xa0 to connect the programming device. (see section 5.2)
networking 5-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 rules (continued) s if you operate more than 32 nodes on a network, you must connect the bus segments via rs 485 repeaters. all bus segments in a profibus subnet must have at least one dp master and one dp slave between them. s you connect non-grounded bus segments and grounded bus segments via rs 485 repeaters (see the description of the rs 485 repeater in the module specifications reference manual). s each rs 485 repeater that you use reduces the maximum number of nodes on each bus segment. that means if a rs 485 repeater is installed in one of the bus segments, only a further 31 nodes can be installed in that segment. the number of rs 485 repeaters has no impact on the maximum number of nodes on the bus, however. up to 10 segments can be installed in a row. s switch the terminating resistor on at the first and last node of a segment. s before you integrate a new node in the subnet, you must switch off its supply voltage. components you connect the individual nodes via bus connectors and the profibus bus cable (see also section 5.2). make sure that the bus connector is provided with a programming device socket so that a programming device can be connected if required. use rs 485 repeaters to connect segments or extend the cable. terminating resistor a cable must be terminated with its surge impedance. to do this, switch on the terminating resistor on the first and last node of a subnet or a segment. the nodes with a terminating resistor switched on must have their power supply switched on during power up and operation.
networking 5-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 the terminating resistor on the bus connector figure 5-1 shows you how to switch on the terminating resistor on the bus connector. terminating resistor switched on terminating resistor switched off on off on off figure 5-1 terminating resistor on the bus connector switched on and off the terminating resistor on the rs 485 repeater figure 5-2 shows you where to switch on the terminating resistor on the rs 485 repeater. terminating resistor of bus segment 1 terminating resistor of bus segment 2 dc 24 v l+ m pe m 5.2 siemens on on figure 5-2 terminating resistor on the rs 485 repeater
networking 5-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example: terminating resistor in the mpi subnet figure 5-3 shows where you must connect the terminating resistor in a possible mpi subnet configuration. rs 485 repeater terminating resistor switched on S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 spur line S7-300 op 25 op 25 pg pg* * connected via spur line for commissioning/maintenance only figure 5-3 connecting terminating resistors in an mpi subnet
networking 5-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example of an mpi subnet figure 5-4 shows an mpi subnet that is configured in accordance with the above rules. S7-300** S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 * connected via spur line for commissioning/maintenance only (with default mpi address) S7-300 ** connected to the mpi subnet later (with default mpi address) 0 13 0 ... x mpi addresses of the nodes 9 10 11 12 1 23456 pg* op 25 op 25 pg op 25** terminating resistor switched on *** the cp also has a profibus address in addition to the mpi address (address 7 here) ****in the case of the cpu 318-2-dp, the fms/cps do not have their own mpi addresses in the case of the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp, you can allocate the mpi addresses as you wish fm**** 8 cp**** 7 profibus subnet*** figure 5-4 example of an mpi subnet
networking 5-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example of a profibus subnet figure 5-5 shows a profibus subnet that is configured in accordance with the above rules. ** connected to mpi via spur line for commissioning /maintenance only (with mpi address = 0) 0 ... x profibus addresses of the nodes S7-300 with cpu 315-2 dp as dp master et 200m 0 11 7 8 9 10 2 3456 et 200m s5-95u et 200b et 200b terminating resistor on et 200m et 200m et 200m et 200b et 200b pd ** * 1 = default profibus address for dp master 1 * 3 0 ... x mpi addresses of the nodes figure 5-5 example of a profibus subnet
networking 5-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example with the cpu 315-2 dp figure 5-6 shows an mpi subnet with an integrated cpu 315-2 dp that is also operating as a dp master in a profibus subnet. op 25 S7-300 S7-300 with cpu 315-2 dp as dp master et 200m s5-95u et 200b rs 485 repeater pg* S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 op 25 et 200m s5-95u et 200b terminating resistor on * connected via spur line for commissioning/maintenance only (with default mpi address) s5-95u et 200b et 200b 1 3 4 56 8 7 12 3 4 5 6 87 10 9 0 ... x mpi addresses of the nodes 0 ... x profibus addresses of the nodes 0 profibus subnet mpi subnet figure 5-6 example of a configuration with the cpu 315-2 dp in an mpi and profibus subnet
networking 5-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.1.3 cable lengths segment in the mpi subnet you can implement cable lengths of up to 50 m (164 ft.) in an mpi subnet segment. the 50 m is measured from the 1st node to the last node of a segment. table 5-3 permissible cable lengths in an mpi subnet segment transmission rate maximum cable length of a segment (in mm) cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp (non-isolated mpi interface) 318-2 (non-isolated mpi interface) 19.2 kbps 50 1000 187.5 kbps 1.5 mbps 200 3.0 mbps 100 6.0 mbps 12.0 mbps segment in the profibus subnet the cable length in a segment of a profibus subnet depends on the transmission rate (see table 5-4). table 5-4 permissible cable lengths in a profibus subnet depending on the transmission rate transmission rate maximum cable length of a segment (in mm) 9.6 to 187.5 kbps 1000 500 kbps 400 1.5 mbps 200 3 to 12 mbps 100 * with a non-isolated interface
networking 5-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 longer cable lengths if you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you must use rs 485 repeaters. the maximum cable length possible between two rs 485 repeaters corresponds to the cable length of a segment (see table 5-4). please note that these maximum cable lengths only apply if no other node is installed between the two rs 485 repeaters. you can connect up to 9 rs 485 repeaters in series. when counting the total number of all nodes to be connected, you must observe, that an rs 485 repeater counts as a node of the mpi subnet, even if it is not assigned an mpi/profibus address. figure 5-7 shows how you can increase the maximum cable length for an mpi subnet by means of rs 485 repeaters. S7-300 50 m 1000 m 50 m rs 485 repeater profibus bus cable figure 5-7 maximum cable length between two rs 485 repeaters length of the spur lines if you do not attach the bus cable directly to the bus connector (for example when using a l2 bus terminal), you must take into account the maximum possible length of the spur line! the following table lists the maximum permissible lengths of spur lines per segment: as of 3 mbps, use the programming device connecting cable with the order no. 6es7 901-4bd00-0xa0 to connect the programming device or pc. other types of spur lines must not be used.
networking 5-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 5-5 lengths of spur lines per segment transmission rate max. length of spur line per segment number of nodes with spur line length of ... g 1.5 m or 1.6 m 3 m 9.6 to 93.75 kbps 96 m 32 32 187.5 kbps 75 m 32 25 500 kbps 30 m 20 10 1.5 mbps 10 m 6 3 3 to 12 mbps example figure 5-8 shows you a possible configuration of an mpi subnet. this example illustrates the maximum possible distances in an mpi subnet. rs 485 repeater rs 485 repeater max. 50m max. 50m max. 1000 m terminating resistor on S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 spur line programming device connected for maintenance purposes via spur line 0 11 0 ... x mpi addresses of the nodes 7 8 9 10 34 5 6 op 25 pg pg op 25 op 25 figure 5-8 cable lengths in an mpi subnet
networking 5-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.2 network components purpose table 5-6 network components purpose components description ... to configure a network profibus bus cable section 5.2.1 ... to connect a node to the network bus connector section 5.2.2 ... to amplify the signal ... to connect segments rs 485 repeater section 5.2.4 and reference manual module specifications ... to convert the signal for a fiber-optic network (for profibus-dp network only) optical link module in the manual simatic net profibus networks ... to connect programming devices/ops to the network programming device connecting cables (spur line) section 5.1.3 in this section this section describes the properties of the network components and information for their installation and handling. you will find the technical specifications of the rs 485 repeater in the reference manual module specifications . section contents page 5.2.1 profibus bus cable 5-16 5.2.2 bus connector 5-17 5.2.3 plugging the bus connector into a module 5-18 5.2.4 rs 485 repeater 5-19
networking 5-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.2.1 profibus bus cable profibus bus cable we can provide you with the following profibus bus cables: profibus bus cable 6xv1 830-0ah10 profibus underground cable 6xv1 830-3ah10 profibus drum cable 6xv1 830-3bh10 profibus bus cable with pe sheath (for food and beverages industry) 6xv1 830-0bh10 profibus bus cable for festooning 6xv1 830-3ch10 properties of the profibus bus cable the profibus bus cable is a shielded twisted-pair cable with the following properties: table 5-7 properties of the profibus bus cable properties values line impedance approx. 135 to 160 w (f = 3 to 20 mhz) loop resistance x 115 w /km effective capacitance 30 nf/km attenuation 0.9 db/100 m (f = 200 khz) permissible cross-sectional core area 0.3 mm 2 to 0.5 mm 2 permissible cable diameter 8 mm " 0.5 mm
networking 5-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 rules for laying when laying the profibus bus cable, you should take care not to: s twist the cable s stretch the cable s compress the cable you should also observe the following when laying the indoor bus cable (d a = outer diameter of the cable): table 5-8 specifications for installation of indoor bus cable properties specifications bending radius (one-off) w 80 mm (10 d a ) bending radius (multiple times) w 160 mm (20 d a ) permissible temperature range during installation 5 _ c to + 50 _ c storage and stationary operating temperature range 30 _ c to + 65 _ c 5.2.2 bus connectors purpose of the bus connector the bus connector is used to connect the profibus cable to the mpi or profibus-dp interface. you thus make the connections to further nodes. the following bus connectors are available: s up to 12 mbps without programming device socket (6es7 972-0ba10-0xa0) with programming device socket (6es7 972-0bb10-0xa0) s up to 12 mbps, angular outgoing cable without programming device socket (6es7 972-0ba40-0xa0) with programming device socket (6es7 972-0bb40-0xa0) no application you do not require the bus connector for: s dp slaves in degree of protection ip 65 (e.g. et 200c) s rs 485 repeaters
networking 5-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 5.2.3 plugging the bus connector into a module connecting the bus connector proceed as follows to connect the bus connector: 1. plug the bus connector into the module. 2. screw the bus connector tight on the module. 3. if the bus connector is installed at the start or end of a segment, you must switch on the terminating resistor (switch setting aono) (see figure 5-9). note the bus connector 6es7 972-0ba30-0xa0 does not have a terminating resistor. you cannot connect it at the beginning or end of a segment. please make sure that power is always supplied to the stations where the terminating resistor is fitted during start-up and normal operation. terminating resistor switched on terminating resistor switched off on off on off figure 5-9 bus connector (6es7 ... ): terminating resistor switched on and off
networking 5-19 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 disconnecting the bus connector with a looped-through network cable , you can unplug the bus connector from the profibus-dp interface at any time, without interrupting data communication on the network. ! warning a data communication error may occur on the network. a network segment must always be terminated at both ends with the terminating resistor. this is not the case, for example, if the power supply is not activated on the last slave with a bus connector. since the bus connector draws power from the station, the terminating resistor has no effect. please make sure that power is always supplied to stations on which the terminating resistor is active. 5.2.4 rs 485 repeater the purpose of the rs 485 repeater the rs 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects network segments. you need an rs 485 repeater if: s more than 32 nodes are connected to the network s a grounded segment is to be connected to a non-grounded segment, or s the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. description of the rs 485 repeater you will find a description and the technical specifications of the rs 485 repeater in chapter 7 of the module specifications reference manual.
networking 5-20 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 installation you can mount the rs 485 repeater either on the S7-300 rail or on a 35-mm standard rail. to mount it on the S7-300 rail, remove the slide at the rear of the rs 485 repeater as follows: 1. insert a screwdriver under the edge of the latching element. 2. move the screwdriver towards the rear of the module. keep this position. 3. move the slide upwards. figure 5-10 shows how the slide of the rs 485 repeater is removed. 3 1 2 figure 5-10 removing the slide on the rs 485 repeater after you have removed the slide, you can install the rs 485 repeater on the rail in the same way as the other S7-300 modules (see chapter 2). use flexible cables with a cross-sectional core area of 0.25 mm 2 to 2.5 mm 2 (awg 26 to 14) to connect the 24v dc power supply. wiring the power supply module proceed as follows to wire the power supply of the rs 485 repeater: 1. loosen the screws amo and apeo. 2. strip the insulation off the 24v dc power supply cable. 3. connect the cable to terminals al+o and amo or apeo. terminal am5.2o terminal am5.2o is a terminal that you do not need to wire, as it is only used for servicing. the terminal am5.2o supplies the reference potential. you need this reference potential to measure the voltage characteristic between terminals aa1o and ab1o.
networking 5-21 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 connecting the profibus bus cable you must connect the profibus bus cable to the rs 485 repeater as follows: 1. cut the profibus bus cable to the length you require. 2. strip the insulation off the profibus bus cable as shown in figure 5-11. the shield braiding must be turned up onto the cable. only thus, the shielding point can later act as a strain relief and a shield support element. 6xv1 830-0ah10 6xv1 830-3bh10 6xv1 830-3ah10 shield braiding must be turned up! 8,5 16 10 6 8,5 16 10 6 16 figure 5-11 lengths of the stripped insulation for connection to the rs 485 repeater 3. connect the profibus bus cable to the rs 485 repeater: connect similar cores (green/red for profibus bus cable) to similar terminals a or b (for example, always connect a green wire to terminal a and a red wire to terminal b). 4. tighten the pressure saddles, so that the shielding is bare under the pressure saddle.
networking 5-22 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
6-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 commissioning software prerequisites you must be familiar with step 7 as of v 5.x to be able to use the complete range of functions of the cpus listed in the chapter entitled important information . if you have installed step 7 < v 5.x and you want to configure your system with these cpus, you have the following alternatives: s if you don't upgrade step 7 < v 5.x, you can use the relevant cpus with low order numbers from the step 7 hardware catalogue. note that you can only use the functions of the previous cpu and of step 7 for the new cpu. important: the cpus 316-2 dp and 318-2 are not in the step 7 < v 5.x hardware catalogue. s upgrade step 7 . get information on update options from the internet at our customer support site or ask your siemens customer advisor. s install the new version of step 7 . prerequisites for commissioning prerequisite see... the S7-300 must be installed chapter 2 the S7-300 must be wired chapter 4 in the case of a networked S7-300: s mpi/profibus addresses must be set s terminating resistors must be switched on (at the segment borders) chapter 5 6
commissioning 6-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 in this chapter section contents page 6.1 inserting the memory card (not cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm) 6-3 6.2 inserting the backup battery or accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) 6-4 6.3 connecting the programming device 6-5 6.4 switching on a S7-300 for the first time 6-10 6.5 resetting the cpu memory 6-11 6.6 commissioning profibus-dp 6-16
commissioning 6-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.1 inserting and changing the memory card (not cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm) exception you cannot insert a memory card with the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm. inserting/changing a memory card 1. set the cpu to stop mode. note if you insert the memory card in a cpu mode other than stop, the cpu will go into stop mode and the stop led will flash at 1 second intervals to request a reset (see section 6.5). 2. is a memory card already inserted? if so: remove it. 3. insert the new memory card in the cpu module shaft. please note that the insertion marking on the memory card points to the marking on the cpu (see figure 6-1). 4. reset the cpu (see section 6.5). insertion marking figure 6-1 inserting the memory card in the cpu
commissioning 6-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.2 inserting the backup battery/accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) exceptions a cpu 312 ifm doesn't have a backup battery or accumulator. since the cpu 313 doesn't have a real-time clock, you don't need an accumulator for backup purposes (see section 8.1.3). inserting the backup battery/accumulator you insert a backup battery or the accumulator in the cpu as follows: note only insert the backup battery in the cpu at power on. if you insert the backup battery before power on, the cpu requests a reset. 1. open the front door of the cpu. 2. plug the battery or accumulator connector into the corresponding socket in the battery compartment of the cpu. the notch on the connector must point to the left. 3. place the backup battery/accumulator into the battery compartment on the cpu. 4. close the front door of the cpu. figure 6-2 inserting a backup battery in the cpus 313/314
commissioning 6-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.3 connecting a programming device prerequisites the programming device must be equipped with an integrated mpi interface or an mpi card in order to connect it to an mpi. cable length for information on possible cable lengths, refer to section 5.1.3. 6.3.1 connecting a programming device to an S7-300 you can connect the programming device to the mpi of the cpu via a preprepared programming device cable. alternatively, you can prepare the connecting cable yourself using the profibus bus cable and bus connectors (see section 5.2.2). programming device cable S7-300 pg figure 6-3 connecting a programming device to an S7-300
commissioning 6-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.3.2 connecting the programming device to several nodes two configuration options when connecting a programming device to several nodes, you must differentiate between two types of configuration: s programming device permanently installed in the mpi subnet s programming device connected for startup or maintenance purposes. depending on which of these configurations you choose, connect the programming device to the other nodes as follows (see also section 5.1.2). type of configuration connection programming device permanently installed in the mpi subnet integrated directly in the mpi subnet programming device installed for commissioning or maintenance programming device connected to a node via a spur line
commissioning 6-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 permanently installed programming device you connect the programming device that is permanently installed in the mpi subnet directly to the other nodes in the mpi subnet via bus connectors in accordance with the rules described in section 5.1.2). figure 6-4 shows two networked S7-300s. the two S7-300s are interconnected via bus connectors. profibus bus cable S7-300 S7-300 pg profibus bus cable figure 6-4 connecting a programming device to several S7-300s
commissioning 6-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 connecting the programming device for service purposes: recommendation for mpi addresses if there is no stationary programming device, we recommend the following: in order to connect a programming device for service purposes to an mpi subnet with aunknowno nodes addresses, we recommend to set the following address on the service programming device: s mpi address: 0 s highest mpi address: 126. afterwards, use step 7 to determine the highest mpi address in the mpi subnet and adjust the highest mpi address in the programming device to that of the mpi subnet. programming device during commissioning or maintenance for commissioning or maintenance purposes, you connect the programming device via a spur line to a node of the mpi subnet. the bus connector of this node must therefore be provided with a programming device socket (see also section 5.2.2). figure 6-5 shows two S7-300s to which a programming device is connected. profibus bus cable programming device cable = spur line S7-300 S7-300 pg figure 6-5 connecting a programming device to a subnet
commissioning 6-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.3.3 connecting a programming device to ungrounded nodes of an mpi subnet connecting a programming device to ungrounded nodes if you have an ungrounded configuration of nodes in an mpi subnet or an ungrounded S7-300 (see section 4.1.4), you may only connect an ungrounded programming device to the mpi subnet or the S7-300. connecting a grounded programming device to the mpi you want to operate the nodes in an ungrounded configuration (see section 4.1.4). if the mpi at the programming device is grounded, you must connect an rs 485 repeater between the nodes and the programming device. you must connect the ungrounded nodes to bus segment 2, if you connect the programming device to bus segment 1 (terminals a1 b1) or the pg/op interface (see chapter 7 in the module specifications , reference manual). figure 6-6 shows the rs 485 repeater as an interface between a grounded and an ungrounded node in the mpi subnet. S7-300 bus segment 2 ungrounded signals pg bus segment 1 grounded signals figure 6-6 programming device connected to an ungrounded S7-300
commissioning 6-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.4 switching on a S7-300 for the first time prerequisites the S7-300 is installed and wired. the mode selector should be in stop mode. switching on for the first time. switch the ps 307 power supply module on. result: s the 24v dc led on the power supply module comes on. s on the cpu the 5v dc led comes on. the stop led flashes at one second intervals while the cpu carries out an automatic reset. the stop led comes on after the memory reset. if there is no backup battery in the cpu, the batf led comes on. note if you insert a memory card and a backup battery before power on, the cpu also requests a memory reset after start-up.
commissioning 6-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.5 resetting the cpu when do you reset the cpu memory? you must reset the cpu memory: s before you transfer a new (complete) user program to the cpu s if the cpu requests a mres with its stop led flashing at 1-second intervals possible reasons for this request are listed in table 6-1. table 6-1 possible reasons for mres request by cpu reasons for mres request by cpu remarks wrong memory card has been plugged in. not with cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm ram error in cpu working memory too small, that is not all blocks of the user program on a memory card could be loaded. cpu with 5v-feprom memory card inserted: in these circumstances the cpu requests a one-off memory reset. after that, the cpu ignores the contents of attempt to load blocks with errors, for example if a wrong command has been programmed. that, the cpu ignores the contents of the memory card, enters the error reasons in the diagnostics buffer and goes to stop. you can erase the contents of the 5v-feprom memory card in the cpu or enter new program. how to reset the memory there are two ways of resetting the cpu memory: memory reset with the mode selector memory reset with programming device ... is described in this section. ... is only possible in stop mode of the cpu (see step 7 -online help).
commissioning 6-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cold start in the cpu 318-2 in the cpu 318-2 you can also carry out a cold start instead of resetting the memory. cold start means: s the data blocks in the working memory created by sfc 22 are deleted. the remaining data blocks have the preassigned value from the load memory. s the process image as well as all times, counters and memory markers are reset irrespective of whether they were parameterized as retentive. s the ob 102 is processed. s before the first command in ob 1, the process image of the inputs is read. resetting the cpu memory or carrying out a cold start (cpu 318-2 only) with the mode selector step resetting the cpu memory (figure 6-7) carrying out a cold start (figure 6-8) cpu 318-2 only 1 turn the key to the stop position 2 turn the key to the mres position hold the key in this position until the stop led comes on for the second time and remains on (this takes 3 seconds). 3 within 3 seconds you must turn the switch back to the mres position and keep holding it until the stop led flashes (at 2 hz). when the cpu has completed the reset, the stop led stops flashing and remains lit. the cpu has reset the memory. within 3 seconds you must turn the switch to the run position. during start-up the run led flashes at 2 hz.
commissioning 6-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 memory reset t on off 3 s max. 3 s min. 3 s stop led figure 6-7 switching sequence for the mode selector for resetting the cpu is the stop led not flashing during memory reset? if the stop led doesn't flash during memory reset or other leds come on (with the exception of the batf led), you must repeat steps 2 and 3. if the cpu does not perform the reset this time, evaluate the diagnostic buffer of the cpu.
commissioning 6-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cold start t on off 3 s max. 3 s 3 s stop led on off run led figure 6-8 switching sequence for the mode selector for cold start (cpu 318-2 only)
commissioning 6-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 what happens in the cpu during memory reset? table 6-2 internal cpu events on memory reset event cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/ 316-2 dp/318-2 cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm cpu activities 1. the cpu deletes the entire user program in its ram and in the load memory (not the eprom load memory). 2. the cpu deletes the backup memory. 3. the cpu tests its own hardware. 4. if you have inserted a memory card, the cpu copies the relevant contents of the memory card into the working memory. tip: if the cpu cannot copy the contents of the memory card and requests memory reset: remove the memory card. reset the cpu memory. read the diagnostic buffer. the cpu copies the relevant contents of the eprom memory into the working memory memory contents after reset the cpu memory is initialized to a0o. if there is a memory card plugged in, the user program is loaded back into the ram. the user program is loaded back into the ram from the integrated retentive eprom of the cpu. what's left? the contents of the diagnostics buffer. you can read the diagnostic buffer with the programming device (see the step 7 online help system ). the parameters of the mpi (mpi address and highest mpi address, transmission rate, configured mpi addresses of cps/fms in an S7-300). the contents of the operating hours counter (not for cpu 312 ifm).
commissioning 6-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 note: mpi parameters the following applies for the validity of the mpi parameters at memory reset: memory reset ... mpi parameters ... with memory card inserted (cpu 313/314/315/31x-2 dp) ... located on the memory card or on the eprom of the cpu are valid. in the case of an integral eprom (cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm) without memory card inserted (cpu 313/314/315/31x-2 dp) ... are retained and are valid. 6.6 commissioning the profibus-dp in this section this section provides you with vital information on commissioning a profibus subnet with a cpu 31x-2 dp. section contents page 6.6.1 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master 6-17 6.6.2 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave 6-18 software prerequisites cpu 315-2 dp as of step 7 v 3.1 as of com profibus v 3.0 cpu 316-2 dp: as of step 7 v 5.x cpu 318-2 as of step 7 v 5 . x as of com profibus v 5.0
commissioning 6-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 6.6.1 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master prerequisites for commissioning s the profibus subnet must be configured. s the dp slaves must be prepared for operation (see relevant dp slave manual). commissioning to commission the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master in a profibus subnet, proceed as follows: 1. load the profibus subnet configuration (preset configuration) created using step 7 with the programming device in the cpu 31x-2 dp. 2. switch on all of the dp slaves. 3. switch the cpu 31x-2 dp from stop mode to run mode. start-up of the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master when the cpu 31x-2 dp is powered up, it checks the preset configuration of your dp master system against the actual configuration. tip: you can set a check time for the test in step 7 . if the preset configuration matches the actual configuration, the cpu switches to run. if the preset configuration does not match the actual configuration, the response of the cpu depends on the setting of the parameter astartup if preset configuration not equal to actual configurationo: startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration = yes (default setting) startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration = no the cpu 31x-2 dp switches to run mode (busf led flashes if any of the dp slaves cannot be addressed) the cpu 31x-2 dp remains in stop mode and the busf led flashes after the time set parameter transfer to modules has elapsed. the flashing busf led indicates that at least one dp slave is not addressable. in this case, you should check that all dp slaves are switched on, or you should read out the diagnostic buffer (see step 7 user manual).
commissioning 6-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 recognizing the operational states of the dp slave in chapter 9 you will find the dependencies of the operating modes of the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master and of a dp slave. tip: when starting up the cpu as a dp master, always program obs 82 and 86. this allows you to identify and evaluate faults and interruptions in data transfer (for cpus configured as dp slaves see also table 9-3 on page 9-9). 6.6.2 commissioning the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave prerequisites for commissioning s the cpu 31x-2 dp must be parameterized and configured as a dp slave (see chapter 9). when configuring it as a dp slave, you must already have decided on the following: should functions such as programming and status/control be available via the dp interface? is the dp master an s7 dp master or another dp master? s all other dp slaves are parameterized and configured. s the dp master is parameterized and configured. note that the cpu 31x-2 dp as dp slave provides address areas of an immediate memory for data interchange with the dp master. you use step 7 to configure these address areas when configuring the cpu as a dp slave (see chapter 9). commissioning to commission the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave in the profibus subnet, proceed as follows: 1. switch the cpu 31x-2 dp from stop mode to run. 2. switch on all of the dp slaves. 3. switch on the dp master.
commissioning 6-19 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave at start-up when the cpu 31x-2 dp is switched to run, two operating mode transitions take place independently of each other: the cpu switches from stop mode to run. at the profibus-dp interface the cpu starts data transfer with the dp master. recognizing the operational modes of the dp master in chapter 9 you will find the dependencies of the operating modes of the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave or as a dp master. tip: when commissioning the cpu as a dp slave, always program obs 82 and 86. this allows you to identify and evaluate operating modes and interruptions in data transfer (see table 9-8 on page 9-20).
commissioning 6-20 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
7-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 maintenance maintenance = replacement the S7-300 is a maintenance-free programmable controller. maintenance involves replacing the following parts: s backup battery/accumulator s modules s fuses on the digital output modules in this section section contents page 7.1 changing the backup battery/accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) 7-2 7.2 replacing modules 7-5 7.3 replacing fuses on 120/230v ac digital output modules 7-9 7
maintenance 7-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 7.1 changing the backup/accumulator (not cpu 312 ifm) replacing the backup battery/accumulator you should only change the backup battery or accumulator when the power is on, in order to prevent the loss of data from the internal user memory, and to keep the clock of the cpu running. note the data in the internal user memory are lost if you change the backup battery when the power is off. change the backup battery with the power switch in the on position only! to change the backup battery/accumulator proceed as follows: step cpu 313/314 cpu 314 ifm/315/315-2 dp/ 316-2 dp/318-2 1. open the front door of the cpu. 2. pull the backup battery/accumulator out of the compartment with a screwdriver. pull the backup battery or accumulator out of the compartment by the cable 3. plug the connector of the new backup battery/accumulator into the corresponding socket in the battery compartment of the cpu. the notch on the battery connector must point to the left! 4. place the backup battery/accumulator into the battery compartment on the cpu. 5. close the front door of the cpu
maintenance 7-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 figure 7-1 changing the backup battery in the cpu 313/314 how often is replacement necessary? backup battery: we recommend changing the backup battery every year. accumulator: the accumulator never needs changing. disposal backup batteries must be disposed of in keeping with the relevant national environment protection regulations/guidelines. storing backup batteries store backup batteries in a dry and cool place. backup batteries can be stored for five years. ! warning if backup batteries are not treated properly, they can ignite, explode and cause severe burning. store backup batteries in a dry and cool place.
maintenance 7-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 rules for the handling of backup batteries to reduce the risk of danger when handling backup batteries, you must observe the following rules: ! warning improper handling of backup batteries can cause injuries and property damage. backup batteries that are not handled properly can explode and cause severe burns. do not s recharge s overheat s burn s puncture s crush s short-circuit backup batteries! rules for handling the accumulator you must not charge the accumulator when not inserted in the cpu! the accumulator can only be charged by the cpu when the power is on.
maintenance 7-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 7.2 replacing modules rules for installation and wiring the following table tells you what you have to do when wiring, detaching and installing the S7-300 modules. rules governing ... power supply ... cpu ... sm/fm/cp blade width of screwdriver 3.5 mm (cylindrical model) tightening torque attaching modules to the rail 0.8 to to 1.1 nm 0.8 to to 1.1 nm terminating cables 0.5 to 0.8 nm power off when replacing the ... yes no operating mode of S7-300 when repla- cing the ... stop load voltage off when replacing the ... yes yes initial situation the module you want to replace is installed and wired. you want to install a new module of the same type. ! warning if you remove or plug in the S7-300 modules during data transmission via the mpi, the data might be corrupted by disturbing pulses. you must not plug in or remove any S7-300 modules during data transmission via the mpi! if you are not sure whether any communications activities are taking place, pull the connector out of the mpi port.
maintenance 7-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 removing a module (sm/fm/cp) detach the module from the rail as follows: step 20-pin front connector 40-pin front connector 1. set the cpu to the stop mode with the key-operated switch. 2. switch off the load voltage to the module. 3. take out the labeling strip. 4. open the front door. 5. unlock the front connector and pull it off the module. to do this, press down on the locking button (5) and, with the other hand, grip the front connector (5a) and pull it out. remove the fixing screw from the middle of the front connector. pull the front connector out while holding the grips. 6. undo the module fixing screw(s). 7. swing the module up and off the rail. 1 3 5 4 6 5a figure 7-2 unlocking the front connector and detaching the module from the rail
maintenance 7-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 removing the front connector coding key from the module prior to installing the new module, you must remove the front connector coding key from the new module. reason: this part is already in the front connector (see figure 7-3). figure 7-3 removing the front connector coding key installing a new module install the new module as follows: 1. hook the new module of the same type onto the rail and swing it down into place. 2. bolt the module tight. 3. slip the labeling strip of the old module into its guide on the new module. 0.8 to 1.1 nm 1 2 1 3 figure 7-4 installing a new module
maintenance 7-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 removing the front connector coding key from the front connector if you want to wire a used front connector for another module, just remove the front connector coding key from the front connector by pressing it out of the front connector with a screwdriver. this upper part of the coding key must then be plugged back into the old module. putting a new module into service proceed as follows to put the new module into service: 1. open the front door. 2. bring the front connector back into its operating position (see section 4.3.3) 3 2 figure 7-5 plugging in the front connector 3. close the front door. 4. switch the load voltage back on. 5. set the cpu again to run. performance of the S7-300 after module replacement when you have replaced a module and no errors have occurred, the cpu enters the run mode. if the cpu stays in the stop mode, you can have the cause of the error displayed with step 7 (see step 7 user manual ).
maintenance 7-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 7.3 replacing fuses on 120/230v ac digital output modules fuses for digital outputs fuses are used for the individual channel groups of the digital outputs of the following digital output modules, to protect these against short circuit: s sm 322 do 16 ac120v digital output module s sm 322 do 8 ac120/230v digital output module replacement fuses if you have to change fuses, you can use, for example, the following replacement fuses: s 8 a, 250 v fuse wickmann 19 194-8 a schurter sp001.013 littlefuse 217.008 s fuse holder wickmann 19 653
maintenance 7-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 position of the fuses the digital output modules have 1 fuse per channel group. the fuses are located at the left side of the digital output module. figure 7-6 shows you where to find the fuses on the digital output modules. fuses figure 7-6 location of the fuses on digital output modules changing fuses the fuses are located at the left side of the module. to change the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. switch the cpu to stop using the key switch. 2. switch off the load voltage of the digital output module. 3. remove the front connector from the digital output module. 4. loosen the fixing screw of the digital output module. 5. swing out the digital output module. 6. remove the fuse holder from the digital output module. 7. replace the fuse. 8. screw the fuse holder back into the digital output module. 9. install the digital output module (see section 2.2.2).
8-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpus in this section section contents page 8.1 control and display elements 8-2 8.2 cpu communication options 8-11 8.3 test functions and diagnostics 8-13 8.4 cpus technical specifications 8-17 8
cpus 8-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1 control and display elements figure 8-1 shows you the control and display elements of a cpu. the order of the elements in some cpus might differ from the order shown in the figure below. the individual cpus do not always have all the elements shown here. table 8-1 shows you the differences. slot for memory card (section 8.1.4) compartment for backup battery or accumulator (section 8.1.3) m l+ m profibus-dp interface (section 8.1.5) status and fault leds (see section 8.1.1) mode selector (section 8.1.2) terminals for power supply and functional ground (section 4.1.3 and 4.1.4), for the cpu 312 ifm section 8.4.1) multipoint interface (mpi) (section 8.1.5) status and fault leds for dp interface (section 8.1.1) figure 8-1 control and display elements of the cpus differences between cpus table 8-1 the differences in control and display elements between cpus element 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315-2 dp 316-2 dp 318-2 leds for dp interface no yes backup battery/ accumulator no no ac- cumu- lator yes terminal connection for power supply no; via front con- nector yes memory card no yes no yes profibus-dp interface no yes
cpus 8-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.1 status and fault displays sf ... (red) ... hardware or software faults (see section 8.3.2) batf ... (red) ... battery fault (see section 8.3.2) (not cpu 312 ifm) dc5v ... (green) ... 5v dc supply for cpu and S7-300 bus is ok. frce ... (yellow) ... force request is active (see section 8.3.1) run ... (green) ... cpu in run mode; led flashes at start-up w. 1 hz; in halt mode w. 0.5 hz stop mode ... (yellow) ... cpu in stop or halt or start-up; led flashes at memory reset request (see section 6.5) busf ... (red) ... hardware or software fault at profibus interface cpu 315-2 dp/ cpu 316-2 dp displays for the cpu: displays for profibus: (see chapter 9) bus2f ... (red) ... hardware or software fault at interface 2 bus1f ... (red) ... hardware or software fault at interface 1 cpu 318-2 figure 8-2 status and fault displays of the cpus
cpus 8-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.2 mode selector the mode selector is the same in all cpus. mode selector positions the positions of the mode selector are explained in the order in which they appear on the cpu. you will find detailed information on the modes of the cpu in the step 7 online help system. position description description run-p run program mode the cpu scans the user program. the key cannot be taken out in this position. run mode run mode the cpu scans the user program. the user program cannot be changed without password confirmation. the key can be removed in this position to prevent anyone changing the operating mode. stop mode stop mode the cpu does not scan user programs. the key can be removed in this position to prevent anyone changing the operating mode. mres mode memory reset momentary-contact position of the mode selector for cpu memory reset (or a cold start as well in the case of the 318-2). resetting the memory using the mode selector requires a special sequence of operations (see section 6.5)
cpus 8-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.3 backup battery/accumulator exceptions cpu 312 ifm has no backup battery or accumulator. the cpu 313 does not require an accumulator since the accumulator does not back up the software clock. backup battery or accumulator? table 8-2 shows the differences in the backup provided by an accumulator and a backup battery. table 8-2 using a backup battery or accumulator backup with... ... backs up remarks backup time accumula- tor real-time clock only the accumulator is recharged when the power of the cpu is on. note: the user program must be stored on the memory card or in the cpu 314 ifm in read-only memory. 120 hours (at 25 _ c) 60 hours (at 60 _ c) ... after 1 hour recharging backup battery s user program (if not stored on memory card and protected against loss on power failure) s more data areas in data blocks are to be retained than possible without battery s the real-time clock note: the cpu can retain some of the data without a battery. you only need a backup battery if you want to retain more data than this. 1 year
cpus 8-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.4 memory card exceptions you cannot insert a memory card with the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm. these cpus have an integrated read-only memory. purpose of the memory card with the memory card, you can expand the load memory of your cpu. you can store the user program and the parameters that set the responses of the cpu and modules on the memory card. you can also save the firmware of your cpu on the memory card (not cpu 318-2). if you store the user program on the memory card, it will remain in the cpu when the power is off even without a backup battery. available memory cards the following memory cards are available: table 8-3 memory cards capacity type remarks 16 kb 32 kb the cpu supports the following functions: s l di f th th 64 kb s loading of the user program on the module into the cpu 256 kb module into the cpu in this function, the memory of the cpu 128 kb 5 v feprom in this function, the memory of the cpu is reset, the user program is loaded on to the memory card and then from the 512 kb t o th e memory car d , an d th en f rom th e memory card to the cpu's working 1 mb memory card to the cpu s working memory. s cop ing of ram to rom (not ith the 2 mb s copying of ram to rom (not with the cpu 318-2 ) 4 mb cpu 318-2) 128 kb 256 kb 5 v ram o l ith th cpu 318 2 512 kb 5 v ram only with the cpu 318-2 1 mb 2 mb
cpus 8-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.5 mpi and profibus-dp interface table 8-4 cpu interfaces cpu 312 ifm cpu 313 cpu 314 ifm cpu 314 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 316-2 dp cpu 318-2 mpi interface mpi interface profibus-dp interface mpi/dp interface profibus-dp interface mpi mpi dp mpi/dp dp reconfiguration as a profibus-dp interface is possible mpi interface the mpi is the interface of the cpu for the programming device/op and for communication in an mpi subnet. the typical (preset) transmission rate is 187.5 kbps (cpu 318-2: can be set up to 12 mbps) you must set 19.2 kbps to communicate with a s7-200. profibus-dp interface cpus with 2 interfaces offer you the profibus-dp interface, which allows them to be connected to a profibus-dp bus system. transmission rates up to 12 mbps are possible. connectable devices mpi profibus-dp s programming device/pc and op s s7 programmable controller with mpi interface (S7-300, m7-300, s7-400, m7-400, c7-6xx) s s7-200 ( note: only 19.2 kbps) s pg/pc and op s s7 programmable controllers with the profibus-dp interface (s7-200, S7-300, m7-300, s7-400, m7-400, c7-6xx) s other dp masters and dp slaves
cpus 8-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 only 19.2 kbps for s7-200 in mpi subnet note at 19.2 kbps for communication with an s7-200, the following applies: a maximum of 8 nodes (cpu, pg/op, fm/cp with own mpi address) are allowed in one subnet. you cannot carry out any global data communication . please consult the s7-200 manual for further information! removing and inserting modules in the mpi subnet you must not plug in or remove any modules (sm, fm, cp) of an S7-300 configuration while data are being transmitted over the mpi. ! warning if you remove or plug in S7-300 modules (sm, fm, cp) during data transmission via the mpi, the data might be corrupted by disturbing pulses. you must not plug in or remove modules (sm, fm, cp) of an S7-300 configuration during data transmission via the mpi! loss of gd packets following change in the mpi subnet during operation ! warning loss of data packets in the mpi subnet: connecting an additional cpu to the mpi subnet during operation can lead to loss of gd packets and to an increase in cycle time. remedy: 1. disconnect the node to be connected from the supply. 2. connect the node to the mpi subnet. 3. switch the node on.
cpus 8-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.1.6 clock and runtime meter table 8-5 shows the characteristics and functions of the clock for the various cpus. when you parameterize the cpu in step 7 , you can also set functions such as synchronization and the correction factor(see the step 7 online help system). table 8-5 characteristics of the clock of the cpus characteristics 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315-2 dp 316-2 dp 318-2 type software clock hardware clock (integrated areal-time clocko) manufacturer setting dt#1994-01-01-00:00:00 backup not possible s backup battery s accumulator operating hours counter number value range 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 8 0 to 7 0 to 32767 hours accuracy s with power supply switched on 0 to 60 _ c s with power supply switched off 0 _ c 25 _ c 40 _ c 60 _ c ... max deviation per day: " 9s +2s to 5s " 2s +2s to 3s +2s to 7s
cpus 8-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 with the power off the following table shows the clock behavior with the power of the cpu off, depending on the backup: backup clock behavior with backup battery the clock continues to operate in power off (except the software clock). with accumulator the clock of the cpu continues to operate when the power is off for the backup time of the accumulator (except the software clock). when the power is on, the accumulator is recharged. in the event of backup failure, an error message is not generated. when the power comes on again, the clock continues at the clock time at which the power went off. none at power on, the clock continues to operate using the clock time at which power off took place. since the cpu is not backed up, the clock does not continue at power off.
cpus 8-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.2 communication options of the cpu the cpus offer you the following communication options: table 8-6 cpu communication options communications mpi dp description pg/op-cpu x x a cpu can maintain several on-line connections simultaneously to one or more programming devices or operator panels. one connection is reserved for a programming device and one for an operator panel. communication sfcs for non-configured s7 connections s via an mpi subnet s within an S7-300 x x x these functions can be used to transfer data over the mpi subnet or within an S7-300. (you will find a list of the sfcs in appendix c.1) communication sfcs for configured s7 connections x x with these s7 connections, the S7-300-cpus are servers for s7-400 cpus. that means the s7-400 cpus can write data to or read data from the S7-300 cpus. global data communication x the cpus of the S7-300 can exchange global data. detailed information you can find out more about communication in the step 7 online help system and in the communication with simatic manual. routing with 31x-2 cpus with the 31x-2 cpus and step7 as of v 5.x you can reach s7 stations online beyond subnet borders with the programming device/pc and, for example, load user programs or a hardware configuration or execute testing and startup functions. to route via the dp interface, you must enable the aprogramming, modifying and monitoring via the profibuso function when configuring and parameterizing the cpu. the cpus 315-2 dp and 316-2 dp provide you with additional connections for routing. in other words, routing does not occupy any other cpu connections. with the cpu 318-2 you must also consider the routing connections for the corresponding interface connections. you can find a detailed description of routing in the step 7 online help system. global data communication with S7-300 cpus below you will find important features of global data communication in the S7-300.
cpus 8-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 send and receive conditions for the communication via gd circuits, you should observe the following conditions: s the following must apply for a gb packet sender: scan rate sender cycle time sender w 60 ms (cpu 318-2: w 10 ms) s the following must apply for a gd packet receiver: scan rate receiver cycle time receiver t scan rate sender cycle time sender non-observance of these conditions can lead to the loss of a gd packet. the reasons for this are: s the performance capability of the smallest cpu in the gd circuit s sending and receiving of global data is carried out asynchronously by the sender and receiver. loss of global data is displayed in the status field of a gd circuit if you have configured this with step 7 . note please note the following in relation to global data communication: global data sent will not be acknowledged by the receiver! the sender therefore receives no information on whether a receiver and which receiver has received the sent global data. send cycles for global data if you set asend after every cpu cycleo in step 7 (as of version 3.0) and the cpu has a short cpu cycle (< 60 ms), the operating system might overwrite an unsent cpu gd packet. tip: the loss of global data is displayed in the status field of a gd circuit if you have configure this using step 7 .
cpus 8-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.3 testing functions and diagnostics the cpus provide you with: s testing functions for commissioning s diagnostics via leds and via step 7 8.3.1 testing functions the cpus offer you the following testing functions: s monitor variables s modify variables s forcen (note the differences between cpus) s monitor block s set breakpoint you can find a detailed description of the testing functions in the step 7 online help system. important with amonitor blocko the step 7 function amonitor blocko increases the cycle time of the cpu. in step 7 you can set a maximum permissible increase in cycle time (not in the case of the cpu 318-2). to do this, you must set aprocess modeo when setting the cpu parameters in step 7 . different features of forcing S7-300 please note the different features of forcing in the different cpus: cpu 318-2 cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp the variables of a user program with fixed preset values (force values) cannot be changed or overwritten by the user program. the variables of a user program with fixed preset values (force values) can be changed or overwritten in the user program. (see figure 8-3 on page 8-14) the following can be variables: inputs/outputs peripheral i/os memory markers you can force up to 256 variables. the following can be variables: inputs/outputs you can force up to 10 variables.
cpus 8-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 forcing with the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp: ! caution the forced values in the process-image input table can be overwritten by write commands (for example t ib x, = i x.y, copy with sfc, etc.) as well as by peripheral read commands (for example l piw x) in the user program or by pg/op write functions! outputs initialized with forced values only return the forced value if the user program does not execute any write accesses to the outputs using peripheral write commands (e.g. t pqb x) and if no pg/op functions write to these outputs! note: the interrupt response time may increase up to 5.5 ms if forcing is active. execute force job for outputs with S7-300 cpus, forcing is the same as acyclical modifyo pii transfer user program os t pqw forced value overwritten by t pqw! execute force job for inputs forced value execute force job for outputs forced value execute force job for inputs os .... operating system execution piq transfer pii transfer os piq transfer figure 8-3 the principle of forcing with S7-300 cpus (cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp)
cpus 8-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.3.2 diagnosis with led displays in table 8-7, only the leds relevant to the diagnosis of the cpu and S7-300 are listed. you will find the significance of the profibus-dp interface leds explained in chapter 9. table 8-7 diagnostic leds of the cpu led description sf comes on in the event of hardware faults programming errors parameter assignment errors calculation errors timing errors faulty memory card battery fault or no backup at power on i/o fault/error (external i/o only) communication error batf comes on when the backup battery is missing, faulty or not charged. note: it also comes on when an accumulator is connected. the reason for this is that the user program is not backed up by the accumulator. stop comes on when flashes when the cpu is not processing a user program the cpu requests a memory reset 8.3.3 diagnosis with step 7 note please note that despite the extensive monitoring and error response functions provided, this is not a safety-oriented or fault-tolerant system. if an error occurs, the cpu enters the cause of the error in the diagnostic buffer.you can read the diagnostic buffer using the programming device. when an error occurs or there is an interrupt event, the cpu either goes into stop mode or you can respond in the user program via error or interrupt obs. you will find a detailed description of diagnosis with step 7 in the step 7 online help system. in appendix b you will find an overview of the following: s which errors or interrupt events you can respond to with which obs s which ob you can program in which cpu
cpus 8-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu behavior when there is no error ob if you have not programmed an error ob, the cpu reacts as follows: cpu goes to stop with missing ... cpu remains in run with missing ... ob 80 (time-out) ob 85 (program execution error) ob 86 (node failure in profibus-dp network) ob 87 (communication error) ob 121 (programming error) ob 122 (i/o direct access error) ob 81 (power supply fault) cpu behavior when there is no interrupt ob if you have not programmed an interrupt ob, the cpu reacts as follows: cpu goes to stop with missing ... cpu remains in run with missing ... ob 10/11 (time-of-day interrupt) ob 20/21 (delay interrupt) ob 40/41 (process interrupt) ob 82 (diagnostic interrupt) ob 32/35 (watchdog interrupt) tip for ob 35 (cpu 318-2: and ob 32) for the watchdog interrupt ob 35/32, you can set times from 1 ms upwards. note: the smaller the selected watchdog interrupt period, the more likely watchdog interrupt errors will occur. you must take into account the operating system times of the cpu in question, the runtime of the user program and the extension of the cycle by active programming device functions, for example.
cpus 8-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4 cpus technical specifications in this section s you will find the technical specifications of the cpu. s you will find the technical specifications of the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm and 314 ifm. s you will not find the features of the cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp master/dp slave. refer to chapter 9. section contents page 8.4.1 cpu 312 ifm 8-18 8.4.2 cpu 313 8-28 8.4.3 cpu 314 8-30 8.4.4 cpu 314 ifm 8-32 8.4.5 cpu 315 8-48 8.4.6 cpu 315-2 dp 8-50 8.4.7 cpu 316-2 dp 8-53 8.4.8 cpu 318-2 8-56
cpus 8-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.1 cpu 312 ifm order no. 6es7 312-5ac02-0ab0 special features s integrated inputs and outputs (wired up via a 20-pin front connector) s no backup battery and therefore maintenance-free s an S7-300 with cpu 312 ifm can be mounted only on one rack integrated functions of the cpu 312 ifm integrated functions description process interrupt interrupt inputs: inputs parameterized in this way trigger a process interrupt at the corresponding signal edge. if you wish to use the digital inputs 124.6 to 125.1 as interrupt inputs, you must program these using step 7 . counter the cpu 312 ifm offers these special functions as an alternative at the digital inputs 124.6 to 125.1. frequency meter for a description of the special functions acountero and afrequency metero, please refer to the integrated functions manual.
cpus 8-19 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 ainterrupt inputso of the cpu 312 ifm if you wish to use the digital inputs 124.6 to 125.1 as interrupt inputs, you must program these in step 7 in the cpu parameters. note the following points: s these digital inputs have a very low signal delay. at this interrupt input, the module recognizes pulses with a length as of approx. 10 to 50 m s. in order to prevent interference pulses from triggering interrupts, you must connect shielded cables to the activated interrupt inputs (see section 4.3.4). note: the interrupt-triggering pulse must be at least 50 m s in length. s the input status associated with an interrupt in the process image input table or with l pib always changes with the normal input delay of approx. 3 ms. start information for ob 40 table 8-8 describes the relevant temporary (temp) variables of ob 40 for the ainterrupt inputso of the cpu 312 ifm. the process interrupt ob 40 is described in the system and standard functions reference manual. table 8-8 start information for ob 40 for the interrupt inputs of the integrated i/os byte variable data type description 6/7 ob40_mdl_addr word b#16#7c address of the interrupt triggering module (the cpu here) 8 on ob40_point_addr dword see figure 8-4 signaling of the interrupt triggering integrated inputs
cpus 8-20 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 display of the interrupt inputs you can read which interrupt input has triggered a process interrupt from the variable ob40_point_addr. figure 8-4 shows the allocation of the interrupt inputs to the bits of the double word. note: if interrupts of different inputs occur at very short intervals (< 100 m s apart), more than one bit can be set at the same time. this means that several interrupts may cause ob 40 to start only once. 0 bit no. prin from i 124.6 54 1 3 2 31 30 prin from i 124.7 prin from i 125.0 prin from i 125.1 reserved prin: process interrupt figure 8-4 display of the states of the interrupt inputs of the cpu 312 ifm
cpus 8-21 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 front view status and fault leds mode selector multipoint interface (mpi) front connector for front connection of the onboard i/o, power supply and functional ground i124.0 i1 i2 i3 i4 i5 i6 i7 i125.0 i1 q124.0 q1 q3 q2 q4 q5 figure 8-5 front view of the cpu 312 ifm
cpus 8-22 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the cpu 312 ifm memory working memory (integral) load memory integral 6 kb 20 kb ram 20 kb eeprom speed approx. 0.7 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 1024 mb 0 to mb 71 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 32 from c 0 to c 31 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity 64 no retentive data area 1 db; max. 72 data bytes maximum sum of retentive data 72 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 512 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class digital inputs digital outputs 128 + 10 integrated 128 + 6 integrated analog inputs analog outputs 32 32 process image integrated inputs outputs external inputs outputs 124 to 127 i 124.0 to i 127.7 q 124.0 to q 127.7 0 to 32 i 0.0 to i 31.7 q 0.0 to q 31.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 8 kb 32 8 kb 32 8 kb 127 (db 0 reserved) 8 kb see appendix see appendix integrated functions counter frequency meter 1 counter , counter frequency 10 khz; 2 directional compa - rators up to 10 khz max. functions real-time clock software clock communication mpi guaranteed pg connections 1 guaranteed op connections 1 free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections 2 guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections 2 global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes no. of nodes max. 32 nodes t ransmission rate 19.2; 187.5 kbps
cpus 8-23 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communication continued mpi distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc power input from 24v (without load current for outputs) 0.7 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external protection for supply lines circuit breaker; 10 a, type b or c power losses 9 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 weight 0.45 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 8 modules on 1 rack norms, t est specifications norms and test specifications see module specifications reference manual technical specifications of the special inputs of the cpu 312 ifm module-specific data number of inputs 4 i 124.6 to 125.1 cable length shielded max. 100 m (109 yd.) v oltages, currents, potentials number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously (horizontal configuration) up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c 4 4 4 status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts process interrupt parameterizable diagnostic functions none sensor selection data input voltage rated value for a1o signal i 125.0 and i 125.1 i 124.6 and i 124.7 for a0o signal 24v dc 15 to 30 v 15 to 30 v 3 to 5 v input current for a1o signal i 125.0 and i 125.1 i 124.6 and i 124.7 min. 2 ma min. 6.5 ma input delay time for a0o to a1o for a1o to a0o max. 50 s max. 50 s input characteristic e 125.0 and e 125.1 e 124.6 and 124.7 to iec 1 131, type 1 to iec 1 131, type 1 connection of 2-wire beros permissible quiescent current i 125.0 and i 125.1 i 124.6 and i 124.7 no max. 0.5 ma max. 2 ma
cpus 8-24 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 time, frequency internal conditioning time for interrupt processing max. 1.5 ms input frequency 10 khz technical specifications of the digital inputs of the cpu 312 ifm note alternatively, you can parameterize the inputs i 124.6 and i 124.7 as special inputs, in which case the technical specifications listed for the special inputs apply to the inputs i 124.6 and i 124.7. module-specific data number of inputs 8 cable length unshielded shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m v oltages, currents, potentials number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously (horizontal configuration) up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c 8 8 8 galvanic isolation no status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts none diagnostic functions none sensor selection data input voltage rated value for a1o signal for a0o signal 24v dc 1 1 to 30 v 3 to 5 v input current for a1o signal 7 ma (typical) input delay time for a0o to a1o for a1o to a0o 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic to iec 1 131, t ype 2 connection of 2-wire beros permissible quiescent current possible max. 2 ma
cpus 8-25 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the digital outputs of the cpu 312 ifm module-specific data number of outputs 6 cable length unshielded shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m v oltages, currents, potentials t otal current of outputs (per group) (horizontal configuration) up to 40 c up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c max. 3 a max. 3 a max. 3 a galvanic isolation no status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts none diagnostic functions none actuator selection data output voltage for a1o signal min. l + ( 0.8 v) output current for a1o signal rated value permissible range for a0o signal residual current 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a max. 0.5 ma load impedance range 48 to 4 k lamp load max. 5 w parallel connection of 2 outputs for dual-channel triggering of a load for performance increase possible not possible t riggering of a digital input possible switching frequency for resistive load for inductive load to iec 947-5-1, dc 13 for lamp load max. 100 hz max. 0.5 hz max. 100 hz inductive breaking voltage limited internally to 30 v (typical) short-citcuit protection of the output response threshold yes, electronically timed 1 a (typical)
cpus 8-26 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 terminal assignment diagram of the cpu 312 ifm figure 8-6 shows the terminal assignment of the cpu 312 ifm. y ou wire the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu using a 20-pin front connector (see section 4.3.3). ! caution the cpu 312 ifm has no reverse polarity protection. if the poles are reversed, the integral outputs are defective but despite this, the cpu does not go to st op and the status leds light up. in other words, the fault is not indicated. i124.0 i1 i2 i3 i4 i5 i6 i7 i125.0 i1 q124.0 q1 q3 q2 q4 q5 figure 8-6 t erminal assignment diagram of the cpu 312 ifm grounded configuration only you can use the cpu 312 ifm in a grounded configuration only . the functional ground is jumpered internally in the cpu 312 ifm with the m terminal (see figure 8-7 on page 8-27).
cpus 8-27 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 power supply connections the power supply for cpu 312 ifm and for integrated i/os is connected to terminals 18 and 19 (see figure 8-6). short-circuit characteristics if a short-circuit occurs at one of the integral outputs of the cpu 312 ifm, you must proceed as follows: 1. switch the cpu 312 ifm to st op or switch of f the power supply . 2. remove the cause of the short-circuit. 3. switch the cpu 312 ifm back to run or switch the power supply back on. basic circuit diagram of the cpu 312 ifm figure 8-7 shows the basic circuit diagram of the cpu 312 ifm. cpu cpu power supply m l + m figure 8-7 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 312 ifm
cpus 8-28 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.2 cpu 313 order no. 6es7 313-1ad03-0ab0 technical specifications of the cpu 313 memory working memory (integral) load memory integral expandable 12 kb 20 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) speed approx. 0.7 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 71 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 31 no retentive times retentive data area 1 db; max. 72 data bytes maximum sum of retentive data 72 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs 128 128 analog inputs analog outputs 32 32 process image inputs outputs 0 to 127 i 0.0 to i 127.7 q 0.0 to q 127.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 8 kb 128 8 kb 128 8 kb 127 (db 0 reserved) 8 kb see appendix c see appendix c functions real-time clock software clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years
cpus 8-29 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 1 1 2 4 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc current drawn from 24 v (idle) 0.7 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 8 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.53 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 8 modules on 1 rack norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-30 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.3 cpu 314 order no. 6es7 314-1ae04-0ab0 technical specifications of the cpu 314 memory working memory (integral) load memory integral expandable 24 kb 40 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) speed approx. 0.3 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 255 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 127 no retentive times retentive data area 8 dbs; max. 4096 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of retentive data 4736 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs 512 512 analog inputs analog outputs 64 64 process image inputs outputs 0 to 127 i 0.0 to i 127.7 q 0.0 to q 127.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 8 kb 128 8 kb 128 8 kb 127 (db0 reserved) 8 kb see appendix see appendix functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years
cpus 8-31 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 buffer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c 4 weeks (typical) 4 weeks (typical) 3 weeks (typical) 1 week (typical) battery charging time 1 h (typical) communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 1 1 2 8 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc current drawn from 24 v (idle) 0.7 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 8 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.53 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 32 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-32 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.4 cpu 314 ifm order no. 6es7 314-5ae03-0ab0 special features integrated inputs/outputs (wired up via 40-pin front connectors) y ou can find detailed information on analog value processing and on connecting measuring sensors and loads/actuators to the analog inputs/outputs in the module specifications reference manual. figures 8-13 and 8-14 on page 8-47 show wiring examples. integrated functions of the cpu 314 ifm integrated functions description process interrupt interrupt inputs: inputs parameterized in this way trigger a process interrupt at the corresponding signal edge. if you wish to use the digital inputs 126.0 to 126.3 as interrupt inputs, you must program these using step 7 . note: t o prevent the interrupt response times of the cpu being increased, you should address the analog inputs of the cpu separately in the user program using l piw . double-word addressing can increase the access times by up to 200 s! counter the cpu 314 ifm of fers these special functions as an alternative at digital inputs 126 0 to 126 3 for a description of these special functions please refer frequency meter pg inputs 126.0 to 126.3. for a description of these special functions, please refer to the inte g rated functions manual. counter a/b to the integrated f u nctions man u al . positioning cont_c these functions are not restricted to specific inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm for a description of these functions please refer to the system and cont_s pp p ifm. for a description of these functions, please refer to the system and standard functions reference manual. pulsegen standard f u nctions reference man u al .
cpus 8-33 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 ainterrupt inputso of the cpu 314 ifm if you wish to use the digital inputs 126.0 to 126.4 as interrupt inputs, you must program these in step 7 in the cpu parameters. note the following points: these digital inputs have a very low signal delay . at this interrupt input, the module recognizes pulses with a length as of approx. 10 to 50 s. in order to prevent interference pulses from triggering interrupts, you must connect shielded cables to the activated interrupt inputs (see section 4.3.4). note: the interrupt-triggering pulse must be at least 50 s in length. start information for ob 40 table 8-8 describes the relevant temporary (temp) variables of ob 40 for the ainterrupt inputso of cpu 314 ifm. the process interrupt ob 40 is described in the system and standard functions reference manual. table 8-9 start information for ob 40 for the interrupt inputs for the integrated i/o byte variable data t ype description 6/7 ob40_mdl_addr word b#16#7c address of the interrupt triggering module (the cpu here) 8 on ob40_point_addr dword see figure 8-8 signaling of the interrupt triggering integrated inputs
cpus 8-34 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 display of the interrupt inputs you can read which interrupt input has triggered a process interrupt from the variable ob40_point_addr. figure 8-8 shows the allocation of the interrupt inputs to the bits of the double word. note: if interrupts of dif ferent inputs occur at very short intervals (< 100 s apart), several bits can be set at the same time. this means that more than one interrupt may cause ob 40 to start only once. 0 bit no. prin from i 126.0 54 1 3 2 31 30 prin from i 126.1 prin from i 126.2 prin from i 126.3 reserved prin: process interrupt figure 8-8 display of the states of the interrupt inputs of the cpu 314 ifm
cpus 8-35 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 front v iew of the cpu 314 ifm in out out m l+ m status and fault leds mode selector compartment for backup battery or accumulator jumper (removable) t erminals for power supply and functional ground multipoint interface (mpi) integrated inputs/outputs figure 8-9 front v iew of the cpu 314 ifm
cpus 8-36 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the cpu 314 ifm memory working memory (integral) load memory integral 32 kb 48 kb ram 48 kb feprom speed approx. 0.3 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 143 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 71 no retentive times retentive data area 2 dbs; max. 144 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of retentive data 144 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs 496 + 20 integrated (of which 4 are spe - cial inputs) 496 + 16 integrated analog inputs analog outputs 64 + 4 integrated 64 + 1 integrated process image integrated inputs outputs 124 to 127 e 124.0 to e 127.7 a 124.0 to a 127.7 external inputs outputs 0 to123 e 0.0 to e 123.7 a 0.0 to a 123.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 8 kb 128 8 kb 128 8 kb 127 (db 0 reser - ved) 8 kb see appendix c see appendix c integrated functions counter frequency meter positioning 1 or 2 counters, counting fre - quency 10 khz; 2 directional compa - rators up to 10 khz max. channel 1 functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years buf fer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c typ. 4 weeks typ. 4 weeks typ. 3 weeks typ. 1 week battery charging time 1 h (typical)
cpus 8-37 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 1 1 2 8 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc current drawn from 24 v (idle) 1.0 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) pg supply on mpi (15 to 30v dc) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c max. 200 ma power losses 16 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 160 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.9 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 31 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-38 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 characteristic features of the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm table 8-10 characteristic features of the integrated inputs and outputs of the cpu 314 ifm inputs/outputs characteristics analog inputs v oltage inputs 10 v current inputs 20 ma resolution 1 1 bits + sign bit galvanically isolated all information required for analog value display and connecting measuring sensors and loads/actuators to the analog inputs and outputs analog output v oltage output 10 v current output 20 ma resolution 1 1 bits + sign bit galvanically isolated i nputs an d outputs can be found in the module specifications reference manual. digital inputs special inputs (i 126.0 to i 126.3) astandardo inputs gp input frequency up to 10 khz non-isolated galvanically isolated rated input voltage 24v dc suitable for switch and 2-wire proximity switches (beros) digital outputs output current 0.5 a rated load voltage 24v dc galvanically isolated suitable for solenoid valves and dc contactors
cpus 8-39 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the analog inputs of the cpu 314 ifm module-specific data number of inputs 4 cable length shielded max. 100 m (109 yd.) v oltages, currents, potentials galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus yes permissible potential difference between inputs and m ana (u cm ) between m ana and m internal (u iso ) 1.0v dc 75v dc 60v ac insulation tested at 500v dc analog v alue generation measuring principle conversion time/resolution (per channel) basic conversion time resolution (inc. overdrive range) momentary value encoding (successive approximation) 100 s 1 1 bits + sign bit interference suppression, error limits interference voltage suppression common-mode interference (u cm < 1.0 v) > 40 db crosstalk between the inputs > 60 db operational error limits (throughout temperature range, relative to input range) v oltage input current input 1.0 % 1.0 % interference suppression, error limits, conti - nued basic error limits (operational limit at 25 c, relative to input range) v oltage input current input 0.9 % 0.8 % t emperature error (related to input range) 0.01 %/k linearity error (related to input range) 0.06 % repeatability (in the settled state at 25 c, relative to input range) 0.06 % status, interrupts; diagnostics interrupts none diagnostic functions none sensor selection data input ranges (rated value)/input resistance voltage current 10 v/50 k 20 ma/105.5 permissible input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) max. 30 v continuous; 38 v for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) permissible input current for current input (destruction limit) 34 ma connection of signal encoders for voltage measurement for current measurement as 2-wire measurement transducer as 4-wire measurement transducer possible not possible possible
cpus 8-40 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the analog output of the cpu 314 ifm module-specific data number of outputs 1 cable length shielded max. 100 m (109 yd.) v oltages, currents, potentials galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus yes permissible potential difference between m ana and m internal (u iso ) 75v dc 60v ac insulation tested at 500v dc analog v alue generation resolution (incl. overdrive range) conversion time settling time for resistive load for capacitive load for inductive load connection of substitute values 1 1 bits + sign bit 40 s 0.6 ms 1.0 ms 0.5 ms no interference suppression, error limits operational error limits (throughout temperature range, relative to output range) v oltage output current output 1.0 % 1.0 % basic error limit (operational limit at 25 c, relative to output range) v oltage output current output 0.8 % 0.9 % t emperature error (relative to output range) 0.01 %/k linearity error (relative to output range) 0.06 % repeat accuracy (in the settled state at 25 c, relative to output range) 0.05 % output ripple; range 0 to 50 khz (relative to output range) 0.05 % status, interrupts; diagnostics interrupts none diagnostic functions none actuator selection data output ranges (rated values) voltage current 10 v 20 ma load impedance for voltage output capacitive load for current output inductive load min. 2.0 k max. 0.1 f max. 300 max. 0.1 mh v oltage output short-circuit protection short-circuit current yes max. 40 ma current output idle voltage max. 16 v destruction limit for externally applied voltages/currents v oltages at the output with ref. to m ana current max. 15 v continuous; 15 v for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) max. 30 ma connection of actuators for voltage output 2-wire connection 4-wire connection for current output 2-wire connection possible not possible possible
cpus 8-41 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the special inputs of the cpu 314 ifm module-specific data number of inputs 4 i 126.0 to 126.3 cable length shielded max. 100 m (109 yd.) v oltages, currents, potentials number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously (horizontal configuration) up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c 4 4 4 status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts process interrupt parameterizable diagnostic functions none sensor selection data input voltage rated value for a1o signal for a0o signal 24v dc 1 1 to 30 v or 18 to 30 v for angle step encoder for int. function apositioningo 3 to 5 v input current for a1o signal 6.5 ma (typical) input delay time for a0o to a1o for a1o to a0o < 50 s (17 m s typical) < 50 s (20 m s typical) input characteristic to iec 1 131, t ype 2 connection of 2-wire beros permissible quiescent current possible max. 2 ma t ime, frequency internal conditioning time for interrupt processing max. 1.2 ms input frequency 10 khz
cpus 8-42 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the digital inputs of the cpu 314 ifm module-specific data number of inputs 16 cable length unshielded shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m v oltages, currents, potentials rated load current l+ polarity reversal protection 24v dc yes number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously (horizontal configuration) up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c 16 16 16 galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus yes permissible potential difference between dif ferent circuits 75v dc 60v ac insulation tested at 500v dc current consumption from l+ supply max. 40 ma status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts none diagnostic functions none sensor selection data input voltage rated value for a1o signal for a0o signal 24v dc 1 1 to 30 v 3 to 5 v input current for a1o signal 7 ma (typical) input delay time for a0o to a1o for a1o to a0o 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms input characteristic to iec 1 131, t ype 2 connection of 2-wire beros permissible quiescent current possible max. 2 ma
cpus 8-43 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical specifications of the digital outputs of the cpu 314 ifm remarks when the supply voltage is switched on a pulse occurs on the digital outputs! this can be s long within the permissible output current range. y ou must not, therefore, use the digital outputs to trigger high-speed counters. module-specific data number of outputs 16 cable length unshielded shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m v oltages, currents, potentials rated load current l+ polarity reversal protection 24v dc no t otal current of outputs (per group) (horizontal configuration) up to 40 c up to 60 c (vertical configuration) up to 40 c max. 4 a max. 2 a max. 2 a galvanic isolation between channels and backplane bus between the channels in groups of yes yes 8 permissible potential difference between dif ferent circuits 75v dc 60v ac insulation tested at 500v dc current consumption from l+ supply (no-load) max. 100 ma status, interrupts; diagnostics status display 1 green led per channel interrupts none diagnostic functions none actuator selection data output voltage for a1o signal min. l + ( 0.8 v) output current for a1o signal rated value permissible range for a0o signal (residual current) 0.5 a 5 ma to 0.6 a max. 0.5 ma load impedance range 48 to 4 k lamp load max. 5 w parallel connection of 2 outputs for dual-channel triggering of a load for performance increase possible, only outputs of the same group not possible t riggering of a digital input possible switching frequency for resistive load for inductive load to iec 947-5-1, dc 13 for lamp load max. 100 hz max. 0.5 hz max. 100 hz inductive breaking voltage limited internally to l+ ( 48 v) typical short-citcuit protection of the output response threshold yes, electronically timed 1 a (typical)
cpus 8-44 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 terminal assignment diagram of the cpu 314 ifm figure 8-10 shows the terminal assignment of the cpu 314 ifm. for wiring up the integrated i/os you require two 40-pin front connectors (order number: 6es7 392-1am00-0aa0). always wire up digital inputs 126.0 to 126.3 with shielded cable due to their low input delay time. ! caution wiring errors at the analog outputs can cause the integrated analog i/o of the cpu to be destroyed! (for example, if the interrupt inputs are wired by mistake to the analog output). the analog output of the cpu is only indestructible up to 15 v (output with respect to m ana ). 1m 1l+ 3l+ 3m 2l+ 2m 1l+ m ana special inputs analog outputs analog inputs i126.0 i126.1 i126.2 i126.3 pqw 128 piw 128 piw 130 piw 132 piw 134 ao u ao i ai u ai i ai ai u ai i ai ai u ai i ai ai u ai i ai 124.0 124.1 124.2 124.3 124.4 124.5 124.6 124.7 125.0 125.1 125.2 125.3 125.4 125.5 125.6 125.7 124.0 124.1 124.2 124.3 124.4 124.5 124.6 124.7 125.0 125.1 125.2 125.3 125.4 125.5 125.6 125.7 digital inputs digital outputs figure 8-10 t erminal assignment diagram of the cpu 314 ifm
cpus 8-45 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 basic circuit diagrams of the cpu 314 ifm figures 8-1 1 and 8-12 show the basic circuit diagrams for the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 314 ifm. l + dac internal supply + ref m adc v a m ana m ana multiplexer v a m ana cpu interface cpu interface m m figure 8-1 1 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 314 ifm (special inputs and analog inputs/outputs)
cpus 8-46 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 1 l+ cpu interface 24v 1m m 2l+ m 2m 3m 24v 24v 3l+ m figure 8-12 basic circuit diagram of the cpu 314 ifm (digital inputs/outputs)
cpus 8-47 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 wiring the analog inputs l + m ana ai u ai i ai_ 2-wire measuring transducer ai_ and m ana we recommend connecting them with a bridge. 1l+ m figure 8-13 wiring the analog inputs of the cpu 314 ifm with a 2-wire measuring t ransducer 1l+ m ana ai u ai i ai_ ai u ai i ai_ 4-wire measu - ring transducer with a 4-wire measuring transducer we recommend connecting ai_ with m ana . unwired channel groups: connect ai_ with m ana . l + m m shielded cables figure 8-14 wiring the analog inputs of the cpu 314 ifm with a 4-wire measuring t ransducer
cpus 8-48 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.5 cpu 315 order no. 6es7 315-1af03-0ab0 technical specifications of the cpu 315 memory working memory (integral) load memory integral expandable 48 kb 80 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) speed approx. 0.3 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 255 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 127 no retentive times retentive data area 8 dbs; max. 4096 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of retentive data 4736 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs 1024 1024 analog inputs analog outputs 128 128 process image inputs outputs 0 to 127 i 0.0 to i 127.7 q 0.0 to q 127.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 16 kb 192 16 kb 192 16 kb 254 (db0 reserved) 16 kb see appendix c see appendix c functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years buf fer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c 4 weeks (typical) 4 weeks (typical) 3 weeks (typical) 1 week (typical)
cpus 8-49 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 battery charging time 1 h (typical) communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 1 1 2 8 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc ( 10 %/+ 15 %) current drawn from 24 v (idle) 0.7 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 8 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.53 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 32 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-50 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.6 cpu 315-2 dp order no. 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 dp master or dp slave you can use the cpu 315-2 dp with its 2nd interface (profibus-dp interface) either as a dp master or as a dp slave in a profibus-dp network. see chapter 9 for a detailed description of the profibus-dp features of the cpu 315-2 dp . technical specifications of the cpu 315-2 dp memory working memory (integral) load memory integral expandable 64 kb 96 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) speed approx. 0.3 ms per 1000 binary instr . bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 255 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 127 no retentive times retentive data area 8 dbs; max. 4096 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of ret. data 4736 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs (central and in a distributed configuration) 1024 1024 analog inputs analog outputs (central and in a distributed configuration) 128 128 process image inputs outputs 0 to 127 i 0.0 to i 127.7 q 0.0 to q 127.7 dp address area 1 kb (see section 9) blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 16 kb 192 16 kb 192 16 kb 254 (db reserved) 16 kb 0 see appendix c see appendix c
cpus 8-51 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years buf fer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c typ. 4 weeks typ. 4 weeks typ. 3 weeks typ. 1 week battery charging time 1 h (typical) communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes 1 1 2 8 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated profibus-dp possible no. of dp slaves address area per dp slave largest consistent block t ransmission rate t ransmission rate detection as a dp slave sync/freeze (as dp master) routing connections direct communication equidistance intermediate memory (as a dp slave) distance 64 244 bytes inputs/ outputs 32 bytes up to 12 mbps no yes yes max. 4 yes yes 244 bytes inputs and 244 bytes out - puts, up to 32 ad - dress areas can be configured, max. 32 bytes per ad - dress area depending on the transmission rate (see section 5.1.3) profibus-dp interface galvanically isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc ( 10 %/+ 15 %) current drawn from 24 v (idle) 0.9 w (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 10 w (typical)
cpus 8-52 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.53 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 32 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-53 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.7 cpu 316-2 dp order no. 6es7 316-2ag00-0ab0 dp master or dp slave you can use the cpu 316-2 dp with its 2nd interface (profibus-dp interface) either as a dp master or as a dp slave in a profibus-dp network. see chapter 9 for a detailed description of the profibus-dp features of the cpu 316-2 dp . technical specifications of the cpu 316-2 dp memory working memory (integral) load memory integral expandable 128 kb 192 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) speed approx. 0.3 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 2048 mb 0 to mb 255 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 64 from c 0 to c 63 from c 0 to c 7 t imes (only updated in ob1!) adjustable retentivity preset 128 from t 0 to t 127 no retentive times retentive data area 8 dbs; max. 4096 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of retentive data 4736 bytes clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data in all per priority class 1536 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 8 per priority class; 4 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob digital inputs digital outputs (central and in a distributed configuration) 2048 2048 analog inputs analog outputs (central and in a distributed configuration) 128 128 process image inputs outputs 0 to 127 i 0.0 to i 127.7 q 0.0 to q 127.7 dp address area 2 kb (see section 9) blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 16 kb 256 16 kb 512 16 kb 511 (db reserved) 16 kb 0 see appendix c see appendix c
cpus 8-54 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 1 0 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years buf fer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c typ. 4 weeks typ. 4 weeks typ. 3 weeks typ. 1 week battery charging time 1 h (typical) communications mpi guaranteed pg connections guaranteed op connections free connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections guaranteed connections for non-configured s7 connections global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes 1 1 2 8 4 1 1 22 bytes 8 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters t ransmission rate distance without repeaters with 2 repeaters with 10 repeaters in series 19.2; 187.5 kbps 50 m (54.5 yd.) 1 100 m (1 199 yd.) 9100 m (9919 yd.) mpi interface non-isolated profibus-dp possible no. of dp slaves address area per dp slave largest consistent block t ransmission rate t ransmission rate detection as a dp slave sync/freeze (as dp master) routing connections direct communication equidistance intermediate memory (as a dp slave) distance 125 244 bytes inputs/ outputs 32 bytes up to 12 mbps no yes yes max. 4 yes yes 244 bytes inputs and 244 bytes out - puts, up to 32 ad - dress areas can be configured, max. 32 bytes per address area depending on the transmission rate (see section 5.1.3) profibus-dp interface galvanically isolated v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc ( 10 %/+ 15 %) current drawn from 24 v (idle) 0.9 w (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 10 w (typical)
cpus 8-55 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 80 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.53 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 32 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-56 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 8.4.8 cpu 318-2 order no. 6es7 318-2af00-0ab0 special features 4 accumulators the mpi interface can be reconfigured: mpi or profibus dp (dp master). data areas can be set (process image, local data) for more information on the dif ferences between the cpu 318-2 and the other cpus, see section 1 1.1. dp master or dp slave you can use the cpu 318-2 dp either as a dp master or as a dp slave in a profibus-dp network. see chapter 9 for a detailed description of the profibus-dp features of the cpu 318-2. definable data areas and occupied working memory you can change the size of the process image for the inputs/outputs and the local data areas when parameterizing the cpu 318-2. if you increase the preset values for the process image and local data, this occupies additional working memory that is then no longer available for user programs. the following proportions must be taken into consideration: process image input table: 1 byte pii occupied 12 bytes in the working memory process image output table: 1 byte piq occupied 12 bytes in the working memory for example: 256 bytes in the pii occupy 3072 bytes and 2047 bytes in the pii occupy 24564 bytes in the working memory . local data 1 local data byte occupies 1 byte in the working memory there are 256 preset bytes per priority class. with 14 priority classes there are therefore 3584 bytes occupied in the working memory . with a maximum size of 8192 bytes you can still allocate 4608 bytes, which are then no longer available for the user program in the working memory .
cpus 8-57 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communication you can reconfigure the first interface of the cpu from an mpi interface to a dp interface (dp master). y ou can run the cpu as a dp master or a dp slave via the second dp interface. in routing, the maximum number of possible connections is reduced for each of the two interfaces by 1 connection for each active pg/op connection that the cpu 318-2 uses as a gateway . technical specifications of the cpu 318-2 memory working memory (integral) for user program for data load memory integral expandable 512 kb 256 kb 256 kb 64 kb ram up to 4 mb feprom (memory card) or up to 2 mb ram (memory card) speed approx. 0.1 ms per 1000 binary instructions bit memories adjustable retentivity preset 8192 mb 0 to mb 1023 mb 0 to mb 15 counter adjustable retentivity preset 512 from c 0 to c 51 1 from c 0 to c 7 times adjustable retentivity preset 512 from t 0 to t 51 1 no retentive times retentive data area 8 dbs; max. 8192 data bytes (in total) maximum sum of retentive data 1 1 kb clock memories 8 (1 memory byte) local data preset expandable to per priority class 4096 bytes 8192 bytes 256 bytes nesting depth 16 per priority class; 3 additional levels within a synchro - nous error ob address area (central and in a distributed configuration) 8 kb process image (default) inputs outputs 0 to 255 i 0.0 to i 255.7 q 0.0 to q 255.7 process image (expanda - ble) inputs outputs to 2047 i 0.0 to i 2047.7 q 0.0 to q 2047.7 blocks obs max. size fbs max. size fcs max. size dbs max. size sfcs sfbs see appendix b 64 kb 1024 64 kb 1024 64 kb 2047 (db 0 reser - ved) 64 kb see appendix c see appendix c
cpus 8-58 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 functions real-time clock hardware clock operating hours counter number v alue range selectivity retentive 8 0 to 7 0 to 32767 hours 1 hour yes backup battery backup time at 25 c and uninterrupted backup of the cpu (incl. 1 mb ram memory card) min. 1 year storage at 25 c approx. 5 years buf fer time of clock with ac - cumulator at 0 c at 25 c at 40 c at 60 c typ. 4 weeks typ. 4 weeks typ. 3 weeks typ. 1 week battery charging time 1 h (typical) communications t otal number of connections using both interfaces (pg/op/configured/not configured s7 connections with terminal point on the cpu) max. 32; 1st mpi/dp interface mpi functionality connections for pg/op/configured/not configured s7 connections/routing of these, the following are reserved: max. 32 1 pg and 1 op con - nection global data communication no. of gd circuits no. of send packets per gd circuit no. of receive packets per gd circuit max. net data per packet length of consistent data per packet number of nodes 8 1 2 54 bytes 32 bytes max. 32; 127 with repeaters t ransmission rate distance 9.6; 19.2; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps; 1.5; 3; 6; 12 mbps see t ables 5-3 and 5-4 on page 5-12
cpus 8-59 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 dp functionality connections for pg/op/configured/non- configured s7 connections/routing of these, the following are reserved: connectable dp slaves address area per dp slave largest consistent block t ransmission rate sync/freeze routing direct communication equidistance intermediate memory (as a dp slave) max. 32 1 pg and 1 op con - nection 32 244 bytes inputs/ outputs 32 bytes up to 12 mbps yes yes yes yes 244 bytes inputs and 244 bytes outputs, up to 32 address areas can be confi- gured, max. 32 bytes per address area 2nd dp interface connections for pg/op/configured s7 connections/routing connectable dp slaves address area per dp slave t ransmission rate t ransmission rate detection as a dp slave sync/freeze (as dp master) routing direct communication equidistance max. 16 125 244 bytes inputs/ outputs up to 12 mbps no yes yes yes yes intermediate memory (as a dp slave) distance 244 bytes inputs and 244 bytes outputs, up to 32 address areas can be confi- gured, max. 32 bytes per address area see t able 5-4 on page 5-12 v oltages, currents rated voltage 24v dc ( 10 %/+ 15 %) current drawn from 24 v (idle) 1.2 a (typical) inrush current 8 a i 2 t 0.4 a 2 s external fusing for supply lines (recommendation) circuit breaker; 2 a, type b or c power losses 12 w (typical) dimensions, configuration installation dimensions w h d (mm) 160 125 130 w eight (without memory card and backup battery) 0.93 kg (15.75 oz) configuration max. 32 modules on 4 racks norms, t est specifications norms, test specifications see module specifications reference manual
cpus 8-60 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
9-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication introduction in this chapter you will find the features and technical specifications of the cpus 315-2 dp, 316-2 dp and 318-2. you will need these in order to use the cpu as a dp master or a dp slave and configure it for direct communication. declaration: since the dp master/dp slave behavior is the same for all cpus, the cpus are described below as cpu 31x-2. in this chapter section contents page 9.1 dp address areas of the cpu 31x-2 9-2 9.2 cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-3 9.3 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master 9-4 9.4 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-10 9.5 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 9-15 9.6 parameter assignment frame and configuration frame 9-29 9.7 direct communication 9-36 9.8 diagnostics in direct communication 9-37 additional literature descriptions and notes pertaining to configuration in general, configuration of a profibus subnet and diagnostics in the profibus subnet can be found in the step 7 online help system. 9
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.1 dp address areas of the cpus 31x-2 address areas of the cpu 31x-2 address area 315-2 dp 316-2 dp 318-2 dp address area for both inputs and outputs 1024 bytes 2048 bytes 8192 bytes number of those in the process image for both inputs and outputs bytes 0 to 127 bytes 0 to 127 bytes 0 to 255 (default) can be set up to byte 2047 dp diagnostic addresses occupy 1 byte for the dp master and for each dp slave in the address area for the inputs. under these addresses, for example, the dp standard diagnosis for the respective nodes can be called (laddr parameter of sfc 13). the dp diagnostic addresses are specified during configuration. if you do not specify any dp diagnostic addresses, step 7 allocates the addresses from the highest byte address downwards as dp diagnostic addresses.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.2 cpu 31x-2 as dp master introduction this section covers the features and technical specifications of the cpu when it is used as a dp master. the features and technical specifications of the cpu 31x-2 as the astandardo cpu are listed in section 8. prerequisites should the mpi/dp interface be a dp interface? if so, you must then configure the interface as a dp interface. before the cpu can be put into operation, it must be configured as a dp master. this means carrying out the following steps in step 7 : s configure the cpu as a dp master. s assign a profibus address. s assign a master diagnostic address. s integrate dp slaves into the dp master system. is a dp slave a cpu 31x-2? if so, you will find that dp slave in the profibus-dp catalog as apre-configured stationo. this dp slave cpu must be assigned a slave diagnostic address in the dp master. you must then interconnect the dp master with the dp slave cpu and stipulate the address areas for data interchange with the dp slave cpu. programming, modifying and monitoring via the profibus as an alternative to the mpi interface, you can program the cpu or execute the pg's monitor and modify functions via the profibus-dp interface. note the use of monitor and modify via the profibus-dp interface lengthens the dp cycle. equidistance as of step7 v 5.x you can parameterize bus cycles of the same length (equidistant) for profibus subnets. you can find a detailed description of equidistance in the step7 online help system.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 power-up of the dp master system cpu 31x-2 dp is dp master cpu 318-2 is dp master you can also set power-up time monitoring of the dp slaves with the atransfer of parameters to moduleso parameter. using the parameters atransfer of parameters to moduleso and aready message from moduleso you can set power-up time monitoring for the dp slaves. this means that the dp slaves must be powered up and parameterized by the cpu (as dp master) in the set time. profibus address of the dp master you cannot set the 126 as the profibus address for the cpu 31x-2. 9.3 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master diagnosis with leds table 9-1 explains the meaning of the busf led. the busf led assigned to the interface configured as the profibus-dp interface will always come on or flash. table 9-1 meaning of the busf led of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master busf description remedy led off configuring data ok; all configured slaves are addressable. led on s bus fault (hardware fault). s check the bus cable for short or interruption. s dp interface fault. s different transmission rates in multiple dp master mode. s evaluate the diagnostic data. reconfigure or correct the configuring data. led flashes s station failure. s at least one of the configured slaves cannot be addressed. s ensure that the bus cable is connected to the cpu 31x-2 and that the bus is not interrupted. s wait until the cpu 31x-2 has powered up. if the led does not stop flashing, check the dp slaves or evaluate the diagnostic data for the dp slaves.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 reading out the diagnostic data with step 7 table 9-2 reading out the diagnostic data with step 7 dp master block or register in step 7 application see... cpu 31x-2 dp slave diagnosis register display slave diagnosis as plain text on the step 7 user interface see the section on hardware diagnostics in the step 7 online help system and in the step 7 user manual sfc 13 adpnrm_dgo read out slave diagnosis (store in the data area of the user program) configuration for the cpu 31x-2, see section 9.5.4; sfc, see system and standard functions reference manual configuration for other slaves, see their description sfc 59 ard_reco read out data records of the s7 diagnosis (store in the data area of the user program) system and standard functions sfc 51 ardsyssto read out system state sublists. call sfc 51 in the diagnostic interrupt with the system state list id w#16#00b4, and read out the system state list of the slave cpu. system and standard functions reference manual evaluating a diagnosis in the user program the following figures show you how to evaluate the diagnosis in the user program. note the order number for the cpu 315-2 dp: cpu 315-2 dp < 6es7 315-2af 03 -0ab0 cpu 315-2 dp as of 6es7 315-2af 03 -0ab0 cpu 316-2 dp as of 6es7 316-2ag00-0ab0 cpu 318-2 as of 6es7 318-2aj00-0ab0 see figure 9-1 on page 9-6 see figure 9-2 on page 9-7
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 read out ob82_mdl_addr (diagnostic address of the dp slave = step7 diagnostic address) diagnostic event ob82 is called read out the parameter ob 82_mdl_type in the local data of ob 82 : the module class is in the bits 0 to 3 (dp slave type) 0011 = dp slave according to the standard 1011 = cpu as dp slave (i slave) call sfc 13 enter the diagnostic address in the laddr parameter read out ob82_mdl_addr (diagnostic address of the dp slave = step7 diagnostic address) call sfc 51 enter the diagnostic address in the index parameter (always the input address here) enter the id w#16#00b3 in the szl_id parameter (= diagnostic data of a module) call sfc 13 enter the diagnostic address in the laddr parameter cpu 315-2 dp smaller than 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 read out ob82_mdl_addr and read out ob82_io_flag (= identifier i/o module) enter bit 0 of ob82_io_flag as bit 15 in ob82_mdl_addr result: diagnostic address aob82_mdl_addr*o for the diagnosis of the modules involved: call sfc 51 enter the diagnostic address aob82_mdl_addr*o in the index parameter enter the id w#16#00b3 in the szl_id parameter (=diagnostic data of a module) other identifier: s7 dp slave figure 9-1 diagnostics with cpu 315-2 dp < 315-2af 03
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 diagnostic event read out ob82_mdl_addr and read out ob82_io_flag (= identifier i/o module) for diagnosis of the whole dp slave: call sfc 13 enter the diagnostic address aob82_mdl_addr*o in the laddr parameter enter bit 0 of ob82_io_flag as bit 15 in ob82_mdl_addr result: diagnostic address aob82_mdl_addr*o for the diagnosis of the modules involved: call sfc 51 enter the diagnostic address aob82_mdl_addr*o in the index parameter enter the id w#16#00b3 in the szl_id parameter (=diagnostic data of a module) cpu 315-2 dp as of 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 cpu 316-2 dp; 318-2 ob82 is called figure 9-2 diagnostics with cpu 31x-2 (315-2 dp as of 315-2af 03 )
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 diagnostic addresses with the cpu 31x-2 you assign diagnostic addresses for the profibus-dp bus system. make sure during configuration that dp diagnostic addresses are assigned to both the dp master and the dp slave. during configuration you must specify two diagnostic addresses: profibus cpu 31x-2 as dp slave cpu 31x-2 as dp master diagnostic address diagnostic address when you configure the dp master, you must specify (in the associated project of the dp master) a diagnostic address for the dp slave. in the following, this diagnostic address is referred to as allocated to the dp master . when you configure the dp slave, you must also specify (in the associated project of the dp slave) a diagnostic address that is allocated to the dp slave. in the following, this diagnostic address is referred to as allocated to the dp slave . the dp master receives information on the status of the dp slave or on a bus interruption via this diagnostic address (see also table 9-3). the dp slave receives information on the status of the dp master or on a bus interruption via this diagnostic address (see also table 9-8 on page 9-20). figure 9-3 diagnostic addresses for dp master and dp slave
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 event detection table 9-3 shows how the cpu 31x-2 as dp master recognizes status changes in a cpu as dp slave or interruptions in data transfer. table 9-3 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as dp master event what happens in the dp master bus interruption (short-circuit, plug pulled) s ob 86 is called and a station failure reported (incoming event; diagnostic address of the dp slave, assigned to the dp master) s with i/o access: ob 122 is called up (i/o access error) dp slave: run stop s ob 82 is called and module fault reported (incoming event; diagnostic address of the dp slave assigned to the dp master; variable ob82_mdl_stop=1) dp slave: stop run s ob 82 is called and module ok reported . (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the dp slave assigned to the dp master; variable ob82_mdl_stop=0) evaluation in the user program table 9-4 shows you how you can, for example, evaluate run-stop transitions of the dp slave in the dp master (see table 9-3). table 9-4 evaluating run-stop transitions of the dp slaves in the dp master in the dp master in the dp slave (cpu 31x-2 dp) diagnostic addresses: (example) master diagnostic address= 1023 slave diagnostic address in the master system= 1022 diagnostic addresses: (example) slave diagnostic address= 422 master diagnostic address=irrelevant the cpu calls ob 82 with the following information: s ob 82_mdl_addr:= 1022 s ob82_ev_class:=b#16#39 (incoming event) s ob82_mdl_defect:=module fault tip: this information is also in the cpu's diagnostic buffer in the user program, you should also include the sfc 13 adpnrm_dgo to read out the dp slave diagnostic data. cpu: run stop cpu generates a dp slave diagnostic frame (see section 9.5.4).
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.4 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave introduction this section lists the characteristics and technical specifications for the cpu when it is operated as a dp slave. the characteristics and technical specifications of the cpu as the astandardo cpu can be found in section 8. prerequisites should the mpi/dp interface be a dp interface? if so, you must configure the interface as a dp interface. prior to start-up, the cpu must be configured as a dp slave. this means carrying out the following steps in step 7 : s aswitch ono the cpu as dp slave. s assign a profibus address. s assign a slave diagnostic address. s stipulate the address areas for data interchange with the dp master. device master files you need a device master file to configure the cpu 31x-2 as a dp slave in a dp master system. the device master file is included in com profibus as of version 4.0. if you are working with an older version or another configuration tool, you can get the device master file from the following sources: s on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd or s via modem from the ssc (interface center) fuerth by calling +49/911/737972.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 programming, modifying and monitoring via the profibus as an alternative to the mpi interface, you can program the cpu or execute the pg's monitor and modify functions via the profibus-dp interface. to do so, you must enable these functions when configuring the cpu as a dp slave in step 7 . note the use of monitor and modify via the profibus-dp interface lengthens the dp cycle. data transfer via an intermediate memory the cpu 31x-2 provides an intermediate memory as dp slave for the profibus dp bus system. the data transfer between the cpu as dp slave and the dp master always takes place via this intermediate memory. you can configure up to 32 address areas for this. this means that the dp master writes its data in these address areas in the intermediate memory and that the cpu reads this data in the user program and vice versa. intermediate memory in the i/o address area profibus i/o cpu 31x-2 as dp slave dp master i/o figure 9-4 intermediate memory in the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 address areas of the intermediate memory in step 7 you configure input and output address areas: s you can configure up to 32 input and output address areas. s each of these address areas can have up to 32 bytes. s you can configure a maximum of 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs. the following table shows the principle of address areas. you can also find this figure in the step 7 configuration. table 9-5 configuration example for the address areas of the intermediate memory type master address type slave address length unit consistency 1 e 222 a 310 2 byte unit 2a 0 e 13 10 word total length : 32 address areas in the dp master cpu address areas in the dp slave cpu these address area parameters must be identical for dp master and dp slave rules the following rules must be followed when using the intermediate memory: s allocating the address areas: input data of the dp slave are always output data of the dp master output data of the dp slave are always input data of the dp master s the addresses can be freely allocated. in the user program, access the data with load/transfer statements or with sfcs 14 and 15. you may also specify addresses from the process input or process output image (also see section 3.2).
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 note you assign addresses for the intermediate memory from the dp address area of the cpu 31x-2. you cannot assign addresses already allocated to the intermediate memory to the i/o modules in the cpu 31x-2! s the lowest address in any given address area is that address area's start address. s the length, unit and consistency of the address areas for dp master and dp slave must be identical. s5 dp master if you are using an im 308 c as a dp master and the cpu 31x-2 as a dp slave, the exchange of consistent data requires the following: in the im 308 c, you must program fb 192 to enable the exchange of consistent data between dp master and dp slave. with fb 192, the data of the cpu 31x-2 data is output or read out contiguously only in a single block. s5-95 as a dp master if you are using an ag s5-95 as a dp master, you must also set its bus parameters for the cpu 31x-2 as a dp slave.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sample program below you will see a small sample program for the exchange of data between dp master and dp slave. the addresses used in the example are those from table 9-5. in the dp slave cpu in the dp master cpu l2 tmb6 lib0 tmb7 data preprocessing in dp slave lmw6 t pqw 310 forward data to dp master l pib 222 tmb50 l pib 223 l b#16#3 + i tmb51 postprocess receive data in dp master l10 +3 tmb60 data processing in dp master call sfc 15 laddr:= w#16#0 record:= p#m60.0 byte20 ret_val:=mw 22 send data to dp slave call sfc 14 laddr:=w#16#d ret_val:=mw 20 record:=p#m30.0 byte20 receive data from dp master lmb30 lmb7 + i t mw 100 postprocess receive data data transfer in stop mode the dp slave cpu goes into stop mode: the data in the intermediate memory of the cpu is overwritten with a0o. in other words, the dp master reads a0o. the dp master goes into stop mode: the current data in the intermediate memory of the cpu is preserved and can still be read by the cpu. profibus address you cannot set the 126 as the profibus address for the cpu 31x-2.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5 diagnostics of the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave in this section in section contents page 9.5.1 diagnosis with leds 9-16 9.5.2 diagnosis with step 5 or step 7 9-16 9.5.3 reading out the diagnostic data 9-17 9.5.4 format of the slave diagnostic data 9-21 9.5.5 station status 1 to 3 9-22 9.5.6 master profibus address 9-24 9.5.7 manufacturer identification 9-24 9.5.8 module diagnostics 9-25 9.5.9 station diagnostics 9-26 9.5.10 interrupts 9-28
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.1 diagnosis with leds diagnosis with leds cpu 31x-2 table 9-6 explains the meaning of the busf leds. the busf led assigned to the interface configured as the profibus-dp interface will always come on or flash. table 9-6 meaning of the busf leds in the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave busf description remedy led off configuring ok. led flashes the cpu 31x-2 is incorrectly parameterized. there is no data interchange between the dp master and the cpu 31x-2. reasons: s check the cpu 31x-2. s check to make sure that the bus connector is properly inserted. s check for interruptions in the bus cable to the dp master reasons: s timeout. s bus communication via profibus interrupted. s incorrect profibus address. dp mas t er. s check configuring data and parameters. led on s short - circuit on bus s check the bus configuration led on s sh or t -c i rcu it on b us. s ch ec k th e b us con fi gura ti on. 9.5.2 diagnosis with step 5 or step 7 slave diagnosis the slave diagnosis complies with en 50170, volume 2, profibus. depending on the dp master, the diagnosis can be read for all dp slaves that comply with the standard using step 5 or step 7 . the following sections describe how the slave diagnosis is read and structured.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 s7 diagnosis an s7 diagnosis can be requested for all the modules in the simatic s7/m7 range of modules in the user program. the structure of the s7 diagnostic data is the same for both central and distributed modules. the diagnostic data of a module is in data records 0 and 1 of the system data area of the module. data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of a module. the data record 1 also contains module-specific diagnostic data. you can find out how to configure the diagnostic data in the system and standard functions reference manual. 9.5.3 reading out the diagnostic data table 9-7 reading out the diagnostic data with step 5 and step 7 in the master system programmable controller with dp master block or register in step 7 application see... simatic s7/m7 dp slave diagnosis register displaying slave diagnosis as plain text to the step 7 surface see the section on hardware diagnostics in the step 7 online help system and in the step 7 user manual sfc 13 adp nrm_dgo reading out slave diagnosis (store in the data area of the user program) see section 9.5.4; sfc: see system and standard functions reference manual sfc 51 ardsyssto reading out system state sublist. in the diagnostic interrupt alarm with the system state list id w#16#00b4, calling sfc 51 and reading out the system state list of the slave cpu. system and standard functions reference manual sfc 59 ard_reco reading out data records of the s7 diagnosis (store in the data area of the user program) fb 99/fc 99 evaluating slave diagnosis on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/ simatic-cs id 387 257 simatic s5 with im 308-c as dp master fb 192 aim308co reading out slave diagnosis (store in the data area of the user program) configuration see section 9.5.4 fbs see et 200 distributed i/o di ml simatic s5 with s5-95u programmable controller as dp master fb 230 as_diago g) device manual
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example of reading out the slave diagnosis with fb 192 aim 308co here you will find an example of how to use fb 192 to read out the slave diagnosis for a dp slave in the step 5 user program. assumptions the following assumptions are made for this step 5 user program: s as a dp master, the im 308-c occupies the page frames 0... 15 (number 0 of the im 308-c). s the dp slave has the profibus address 3. s the slave diagnosis should be stored in data block 20. you can also use any data block for this. s the slave diagnosis consists of 26 bytes. step 5 user program stl description :a db 30 :spa fb 192 name :im308c dpad : kh f800 imst : ky 0, 3 fct : kc sd gcgr : km 0 typ : ky 0, 20 stad : kf +1 leng : kf 26 err : dw 0 default address area of the im 308-c im no. = 0, profibus address of the dp slave = 3 function: read slave diagnosis not evaluated s5 data area: db 20 diagnostic data as of data word 1 length of dignostic data = 26 bytes error code storage in dw 0 of the db 30 example of reading out the s7 diagnosis with sfc 59 ard_reco here you will find an example of how to use the sfc 59 to read out the data records of the s7 diagnosis for a dp slave in the step 7 user program. reading out the slave diagnosis with sfc 13 is similar. assumptions the following assumptions are made for this step 7 user program: s the diagnosis for the input module with the address ffff h is to be read out. s data record 1 is to be read out. s data record 1 is to be stored in db 10.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-19 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 step 7 user program stl description call sfc 59 req :=true ioid :=b#16#54 laddr :=w#16#ffff recnum :=b#16#1 ret_val := busy :=true record :=db 10 request to read identifier of the address area, here the i/o input logical address of the module data record 1 is to be read out errors result in the output of an error code reading process is not finished destination area for the read data record 1 is data block 10 diagnostic addresses with the cpu 31x-2, you assign diagnostic addresses for the profibus-dp bus system. during configuration, make sure that dp diagnostic addresses are assigned to both the dp master and the dp slave. during configuration you specify two diagnostic addresses: profibus cpu 31x-2 as dp slave cpu 31x-2 as dp master diagnostic address diagnostic address when you configure the dp master, you must specify (in the associated project of the dp master) a diagnostic address for the dp slave. in the following, this diagnostic address is referred to as allocated to the dp master . when you configure the dp slave, you must also specify (in the associated project for the dp slave) a diagnostic address that is allocated to the dp slave. in the following, this diagnostic address is referred to as allocated to the dp slave . the dp master receives information on the status of the dp slave or on a bus interruption via this diagnostic address (see also table 9-3 on page 9-9). the dp slave receives information on the status of the dp master or on a bus interruption via this diagnostic address (see also table 9-8). figure 9-5 diagnostic addresses for dp master and dp slave
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-20 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 event detection table 9-8 shows how the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave recognizes status changes or interruptions in the transfer of data. table 9-8 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave event what happens in the dp slave bus interruption (short-circuit, plug pulled) s ob 86 is called and station failure reported (incoming event; diagnostic address of the dp slave assigned to the dp slave) s in the case of i/o access: ob 122 is called (i/o access error) dp master: run stop s ob 82 is called and module fault reported (incoming event; diagnostic address of the dp slave assigned to the dp slave) variable ob82_mdl_stop=1) dp master: stop run s ob 82 is called and module ok reported . (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the dp slave assigned to the dp slave) variable ob82_mdl_stop=0) evaluation in the user program table 9-9 shows you how you can, for example, evaluate run-stop transitions of the dp master in the dp slave (see table 9-8). table 9-9 evaluating run-stop transitions in the dp master/dp slave in the dp master in the dp slave diagnostic addresses: (sample) master diagnostic address= 1023 slave diagnostic address in the master system= 1022 diagnostic addresses: (example) slave diagnostic address= 422 master diagnostic address=not relevant cpu: run stop the cpu calls ob 82 with the following information: s ob 82_mdl_addr:= 422 s ob82_ev_class:=b#16#39 (incoming event) s ob82_mdl_defect:=module fault tip: this information is also in the cpu's diagnostic buffer
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-21 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.4 structure of the slave diagnostic data structure of the slave diagnostic data byte 0 byte 1 station status 1 to 3 byte 2 byte 3 master profibus address byte 4 byte 5 low byte high byte manufacturer identification byte 6 to module diagnosis byte x station diagnosis . . . . . . byte x+1 to byte y (the length depends on the number of address areas configured for the intermediate memory 1 ) (the length depends on the number of address areas configured for the intermediate memory) 1 exception: if the dp master is incorrectly configured, the dp slave interprets 35 configured address areas (46 h ). figure 9-6 structure of the slave diagnostic data
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-22 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.5 station status 1 to 3 definition station status 1 to 3 provides an overview of the status of a dp slave. station status 1 table 9-10 structure of station status 1 (byte 0) bit description remedy 0 1: dp slave cannot be addressed by dp master. s is the correct dp address set on the dp slave? s is the bus connector inserted? s does the dp slave have power? s is the rs 485 repeater correctly set? s execute a reset on the dp slave. 1 1: dp slave is not ready for data interchange. s wait; the dp slave is still doing its run-up. 2 1: the configuration data which the dp master sent to the dp slave do not correspond with the dp slave's actual configuration. s was the software set for the right station type or the right dp slave configuration? 3 1: diagnostic interrupt, generated by a run/stop transition on the cpu 0: diagnostic interrupt, generated by a stop/run transition on the cpu s you can read out the diagnostic data. 4 1: function is not supported, for instance changing the dp address at the software level. s check the configuring data. 5 0: this bit is always a0o. 6 1: dp slave type does not correspond to the software configuration. s was the software set for the right station type? (parameter assignment error) 7 1: dp slave was parameterized by a different dp master to the one that currently has access to it. s bit is always a1o when, for instance, you are currently accessing the dp slave via the pg or a different dp master. the dp address of the master that parameterized the slave is located in the amaster profibus addresso diagnostic byte.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-23 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 station status 2 table 9-11 structure of station status 2 (byte 1) bit description 0 1: dp slave must be parameterized again and reconfigured. 1 1: a diagnostic message has arrived. the dp slave cannot continue operation until the error has been rectified (static diagnostic message). 2 1: this bit is always a1o when there is a dp slave with this dp address. 3 1: the watchdog monitor has been activated for this dp slave. 4 0: this bit is always a0o. 5 0: this bit is always a0o. 6 0: this bit is always a0o. 7 1: dp slave is deactivated, that is to say, it has been removed from the scan cycle. station status 3 table 9-12 structure of station status 3 (byte 2) bit description 0 to 6 0: these bits are always a0o. 7 1: s more diagnostic messages have arrived than the dp slave can buffer. s the dp master cannot enter all the diagnostic messages sent by the dp slave in its diagnostic buffer.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-24 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.6 master profibus address definition the dp address of the dp master is stored in the master profibus address diagnostic byte: s the master that parameterized the dp slave s the master that has read and write access to the dp slave master profibus address table 9-13 structure of the master profibus address (byte 3) bit description 0 to 7 dp address of the dp master that parameterized the dp slave and has read/write access to that dp slave. ff h : dp slave was not parameterized by a dp master. 9.5.7 manufacturer id definition the manufacturer identification contains a code specifying the dp slave's type. manufacturer identification table 9-14 structure of the manufacturer identification (bytes 4 and 5) byte 4 byte 5 manufacturer identification for 80 h 2fh cpu 315-2 dp 80 h 6f h cpu 316-2 dp 80 h 7f h cpu 318-2
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-25 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.8 module diagnosis definition the module diagnosis specifies which of the configured address areas of the intermediate memory an input has been made for. byte 6 70 bit no. length of the module diagnosis, including byte 6 (up to 6 bytes, depending on the number of configured address areas) byte 7 preset configuration 0 actual configuration or slave cpu in stop mode entry for 2nd configured address area entry for 3rd configured address area entry for 4th configured address area entry for 5th configured address area byte 8 entry for 6th to 13th configured address area code for module diagnosis 01 7654 1 0 21 3 entry for 1st configured address area bit no. bit no. 7654 3 byte 11 entry for 30th configured address area entry for 31st configured address area 0 21 bit no. 7654 3 byte 8 0 21 bit no. 7654 3 byte 8 0 21 7654 3 byte 9 entry for 14th to 21st configured address area 0 21 bit no. 7654 3 byte 10 entry for 22nd to 29th configured address area 0 21 bit no. 7654 3 entry for 32nd configured address area 0 00 00 desired config. 0 actual config. desired config. 0 actual config. figure 9-7 structure of the module diagnosis of the cpu 31x-2
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-26 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.9 station diagnosis definition the station diagnosis gives detailed information on a dp slave. the station diagnosis begins as of byte x and can have a maximum of 20 bytes. station diagnosis the following figure describes the structure and content of the bytes for a configured address area of the intermediate memory. byte x+1 01 h : code for diagnostic interrupt 02 h : code for process interrupt byte x +4 to byte x +7 byte x 70 bit no. length of the station diagnosis incl. byte x (= max. 20 bytes) code for station diagnostics 00 6 byte x+2 byte x+3 number of the configured address area of the intermediate memory the rule is: number+3 (example: cpu = 02 h address area 1 = 04 h address area 2 = 05 h etc.) (always 0) diagnostic data (see figure 9-9) or interrupt data 70 00000000 figure 9-8 structure of the station diagnosis
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-27 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 as of byte x +4 the purpose of the bytes beginning with byte x+4 depends on byte x+1 (see figure 9-8). byte x+1 contains the code for... diagnostic interrupt (01 h ) process interrupt (02 h ) the diagnostic data contain the 16 bytes of status information from the cpu. figure 9-9 shows the contents of the first four bytes of diagnostic data. the next 12 bytes are always 0. for a process interrupt, you can program four bytes of interrupt information. these four bytes are forwarded to the dp master in step 7 with the sfc 7 command adp_pralo (see section 9.5.10). bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupts figure 9-9 shows the configuration and contents of bytes x +4 to x +7 for diagnostic interrupt. the contents of these bytes correspond to the contents of data record 0 of the diagnostic data in step 7 (in this case, not all bits are assigned). byte x+4 70 bit no. byte x+5 byte x+6 0: run mode 1: stop mode 0: module ok. 1: module fault 0 1 00 0 0 1 74 0 0 2 3 bit no. bit no. 7 0 2 7 0 0 000 00 1 identifier for the address area of the intermediate memory (constant) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 byte x+7 70 bit no. 00000 000 figure 9-9 bytes +4 to +7 for diagnostic and process interrupts
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-28 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.5.10 interrupts interrupts with the s7/m7 dp master in the cpu 31x-2 as dp slave you can trigger a process interrupt in the dp master from the user program. ob 40 is called in the dp master's user program by calling sfc 7 adp_pralo. sfc 7 allows you to forward interrupt information in a doubleword to the dp master; this information can then be evaluated in ob 40 in variable ob40_point_addr. you can program the interrupt information as desired. a detailed description of sfc 7 adp_pralo can be found in the reference manual entitled system software S7-300/400 - system and standard functions . interrupts with another dp master if you are running the cpu 31x-2 with another dp master, these interrupts are reflected in the station diagnosis of the cpu 31x-2. you must postprocess the relevant diagnostic events in the dp master's user program. note note the following in order to be able to evaluate diagnostic interrupts and process interrupts via the device-related diagnostics when using a different dp master: s the dp master should be able to store the diagnostic messages, that is, the dp master should have a ring buffer in which to place these messages. if the dp master can not store diagnostic messages, only the last diagnostic message would be available for evaluation. s you must scan the relevant bits in the device-related diagnostic data in your user program at regular intervals. you must also take the profibus-dp's bus cycle time into consideration so that you can scan the bits at least once in sync with the bus cycle time, for example. s when using an im 308-c as dp master, you can not utilize process interrupts in device-related diagnostics, as only incoming interrupts can be signaled, not outgoing interrupts.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-29 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.6 parameter assignment frame and configuration frame with step 7 when you configure and parameterize the address areas of the intermediate memory of the cpu 31x-2 with step 7 , step 7 and the online help system support you. with com profibus when you configure and parameterize the address areas of the intermediate memory of the cpu 31x-2 with com profibus v 4.0, com profibus and the online help system support you. configuration/parameterization when you enter the address areas of the intermediate memory of the cpu 31x-2 using a configuration frame and a parameter assignment frame, e.g. cp 342-5 in an S7-300 or cp 5431 as dp master or another dp master, you will find the structure of the configuration frame and the parameter assignment frame in the following sections. in this section the following section contains all the information you need to configure and parameterize the address areas of the intermediate memory with a software tool. section contents page 9.6.1 structure of the parameter assignment frame 9-30 9.6.2 structure of the configuration frame (s7 format) 9-32 9.6.3 structure of the configuration frame for non-s7 dp masters 9-34
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-30 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.6.1 structure of the parameter assignment frame definition: parameter assignment frame all the values of a dp slave that can be parameterized are stored in the parameter assignment frame. the length of the parameter assignment frame may not exceed 178 bytes. structure of the parameter assignment frame the length of the parameter assignment frame for the cpu 31x-2 is 10 bytes: s standardized portion (bytes 0 to 6) s parameters of the cpu 31x-2 (bytes 7 to 9). standard part the first seven bytes of the parameter assignment frame are standardized to en 50170; for the cpu 315-2, for example, they can have the following contents: byte 3 wd factor 1 t rdy station status wd factor 2 manufacturer identification high byte byte 0 byte 1 byte 2 byte 4 01 h 0b h 88 h 06 h 80 h byte 5 manufacturer identification low byte group identification byte 6 2f h 00 h figure 9-10 standardized portion of the parameter assignment frame (example)
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-31 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 configuration of the parameters for the cpu 31x-2 the length of the parameters for the cpu 31x-2 is 3 bytes: the default assignment for these 3 bytes is: c0 h 60 h 00 h . the parameters have the following meanings: byte 7 7 bit no. 0: another dp master 1: s7/m7 dp master byte 8 6 process interrupt enable diagnostic interrupt enable 5 byte 9 watchdog base 0: 10 ms (another dp master) 1: 1 ms (s7/m7 dp master) 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fail safe mode: is set by step 7 or com profibus, depending on dp master figure 9-11 parameters for the cpu 31x-2
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-32 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.6.2 structure of the configuration frame (s7 format) structure of the configuration frame the length of the configuration frame depends on the number of address areas configured for the cpu's intermediate memory. the first 15 bytes in the configuration frame are reserved. the format of the configuration frame is as follows: table 9-15 structure of the configuration frame config red address area byte configured address area n n + 1 n + 2 n + 3 n + 4 04 00 00 ad c4 these bytes are reserved: 04 00 00 8b 41 04 00 00 8f c0 1st configured address area (n = 15) 2nd configured address area (n = 20) see table 9-16 ... 32nd configured address area (n = 170)
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-33 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 identifiers for the address areas the identifiers for configuring depend on the type of the address area. table 9-16 lists all the identifiers for the address areas. table 9-16 identifiers for the address areas of the intermediate memory identifiers (hexadecimal) address area special identifier format length byte manufacturer-specific data comment length = 3 byte 0 byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 input see figure 9-12 see figure 00 h 83 h 40 h output 9 - 12 fi gure 9-13 00 h 93 h 40 h byte 0 70 bit no. 6 4 5 31 2 0011: number of manufacturer-specific data (bytes 2, 3 and 4 in table 9-16) 0 0 00: blank space 01: 1-byte length byte for inputs follows 10: 1-byte length byte for outputs follows figure 9-12 description of byte 0 of the cpu's address area identifiers byte 1 70 bit no. 6 4 5 31 2 length of the inputs/outputs in bytes or words + 1 0: length in bytes 1: length in words consistency over... 0: byte or word 1: total length (0: 1 byte or word 1: 2 bytes/word) figure 9-13 description of byte 1 of the cpu's address area identifiers
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-34 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 example of a configuration frame below is a sample configuration frame for the cpu 315-2 dp. format: s a power supply module s the cpu 315-2 dp s an address area in the dp master (= output address area in the dp slave), two bytes in length and with consistency over the entire area the configuration frame thus comprises 20 bytes and looks like this: 04 00 00 ad c4 04 00 00 8b 41 04 00 00 8f c0 43 81 00 83 40 1st configured input address area of the cpu's intermediate memory permanent value permanent value permanent value 9.6.3 structure of the configuration frame for non-s7 dp masters type/device master file if your dp master does not support the configuration frame in s7 format (see section 9.6.2), you can obtain a type/device master file in non-s7 format by calling the ssc (interface center) fuerth. the device master file can be obtained via modem from the ssc (interface center) fuerth by calling +49/911/737972.
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-35 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 structure of the configuration frame the length of the configuration frame depends on the number of address areas configured for the cpu's intermediate memory. the first three bytes of the configuration frame are always a0o. the format of the configuration frame is as follows: in this format, you can only configure a length of no more than 16 bytes or 16 words. for a length of 32 bytes, you would thus have to configure a length of 16 words. table 9-17 structure of the configuration frame for non-s7 dp masters configured address areas byte 1. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4. 70 bit no. 6 4 5 31 2 in bytes or words : length of the inputs/outputs in bytes or words 01: in p uts : 0: length in bytes 1: length in words 01 : i npu t s 10: outputs 32nd g consistency over... 0: byte or word 1: total length
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-36 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.7 direct communication as of step 7 v 5.x you can configure direct communication for profibus nodes. the cpu 31x-2 can take part in direct communication as the sender or receiver. direct communication is a special communication relationship between profibus-dp nodes. principle direct communication is characterized by the fact that the profibus-dp nodes listen in to find out which data a dp slave is sending back to its dp master. using this function the eavesdropper (receiver) can directly access changes in the input data of remote dp slaves. during configuration in step 7 , in addition to defining the relevant i/o input addresses, you can also define which of the receiver's address areas the required data from the sender will be read to. a cpu 31x-2 can be one of the following: sender as dp slave receiver as dp slave or dp master or as cpu not included in a master system (see figure 9-14). example figure 9-14 gives you an example of the direct communication relationships you can configure. in the figure all the dp masters and dp slaves are cpu 31x-2s. note that other dp slaves (et 200m, et 200x, et 200s) can only be senders. profibus cpu 31x-2 as dp master 1 cpu 31x-2 dp slave 3 dp slave 5 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 1 dp master system 1 dp master system 2 cpu 31x-2 as dp master 2 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 2 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave 4 figure 9-14 direct communication with cpu 31x-2
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-37 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 9.8 diagnostics in direct communication diagnostic addresses in direct communication you allocate a diagnostic address in the receiver: profibus cpu 31x-2 as receiver cpu 31x-2 as sender diagnostic address during configuration you define in the receiver a diagnostic address that is allocated to the sender. the receiver receives information on the status of the sender or on a bus interruption via this diagnostic address (see also table 9-18). figure 9-15 diagnostic address for the receiver during direct communication event detection table 9-18 shows how the cpu 31x-2 as receiver detects interruptions in the transfer of data. table 9-18 event detection of the cpu 31x-2 as receiver during direct communication event what happens in the receiver bus interruption (short-circuit, plug pulled) s ob 86 is called and station failure reported (incoming event; diagnostic address of the receiver, assigned to the sender) s in the case of i/o access: ob 122 is called (i/o access error)
cpu 31x-2 as dp master/dp slave and direct communication 9-38 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 evaluation in the user program table 9-19 shows you how you can, for example, evaluate the station failure of the sender in the receiver (see also table 9-18). table 9-19 evaluation of the station failure of the sender during direct communication in the sender in the receiver diagnostic addresses: (example) master diagnostic address= 1023 slave diagnostic address in the master system= 1022 diagnostic address: (example) diagnostic address= 444 station failure the cpu calls ob 86 with the following information: s ob 86_mdl_addr:= 444 s ob86_ev_class:=b#16#38 (incoming event) s ob86_flt_id:=b#16#c4 (failure of a dp station) tip: this information is also in the cpu's diagnostic buffer
10-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cycle and response times of the S7-300 introduction in this section, we explain what the cycle time and the response time of the S7-300 consist of. you can use the programming device to read out the cycle time of your user program on the cpu (see the step 7 online help system ). the example below shows you how to calculate the cycle time. the response time is more important for the process. in this chapter we will show you in detail how to calculate the response time. in this chapter section contents page 10.1 cycle time 10-2 10.2 response time 10-3 10.3 calculation example for cycle time and response time 10-10 10.4 interrupt response time 10-14 10.5 calculation example for the interrupt response time 10-16 10.6 reproducibility for delay and watchdog interrupt 10-16 further information you will find further information on the processing times in ... s ... the S7-300 instruction list . there you will find all the step 7 instructions which can be processed on the various cpus, together with their execution time. s ....see appendix c. here you will find a list of all the sfcs/sfbs integrated in the cpus, as well as the step 7 iec functions and their execution times. 10
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 10.1 cycle time cycle time a definition the cycle time is the time that elapses during one program cycle. component parts of the cycle time the cycle time comprises: factors remarks operating system execution time process image transfer time (pii and piq) see section 10.2 user program execution time can be calculated on the basis of the execution times of the individual instructions (see the S7-300 instruction list ) and a cpu-specific factor (see table 10-3) s7 timer (not in the case of the cpu 318-2) profibus dp see section 10.2 integrated functions communication via the mpi you parameterize the maximum permissible cycle load produced by communication in percent in step 7 loading through interrupts see sections 10.4 and 10.5 figure 10-1 shows the component parts of the cycle time pii operating system user program piq interrupts operating system user program figure 10-1 component parts of the cycle time
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 extending the cycle time note that the cycle time of a user program is extended by the following: s time-controlled interrupt handling s process interrupt handling (see also section 10.4) s diagnostics and error handling (see also section 10.4) s communication via mpi 10.2 response time response time a definition the response time is the time between detection of an input signal and modification of an associated output signal. factors the response time depends on the cycle time and the following factors: factors remarks delay of the inputs and outputs the delay times are given in the technical specifications s in the module specifications reference manual for the signal modules s in section 8.4.1 for the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm. s in section 8.4.4 for the integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 314 ifm. additional bus runtimes on the profibus subnet cpu 31x-2 dp only range of fluctuation the actual response time lies between a shortest and a longest response time. you must always reckon on the longest response time when configuring your system. the shortest and longest response times are considered below to let you get an idea of the width of fluctuation of the response time.
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 shortest response time figure 10-2 shows you the conditions under which the shortest response time is reached. operating system user program pii the status of the observed input changes immediately before reading in the pii. the change in the input signal is therefore taken account of in the pii. piq the change in the input signal is processed by the user program here. the response of the user program to the input signal change is passed on to the outputs here. response time delay of the inputs delay of the outputs figure 10-2 shortest response time calculation the (shortest) response time consists of the following: s 1 process image transfer time for the inputs + s 1 operating system execution time + s 1 program execution time + s 1 process image transfer time for outputs + s execution time of s7 timer s delay of the inputs and outputs this corresponds to the sum of the cycle time and the delay of the inputs and outputs.
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 longest response time figure 10-3 shows the conditions that result in the longest response time. operating system user program pii while the pii is being read in, the status of the observed input changes. the change in the input signal is no longer taken into account in the pii. piq the change in the input signal is taken account of in the pii here. the change in the input signal is processed by the user program here. the response of the user program to the input signal change is passed on to the outputs here. response time delay of the inputs + bus runtime on the profibus-dp delay of the outputs + bus runtime on the profibus-dp operating system user program pii piq figure 10-3 longest response time
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 calculation the (longest) response time consists of the following: s 2 process image transfer time for the inputs + s 2 process image transfer time for the outputs + s 2 operating system execution time + s 2 program execution time + s 2 bus runtime on the profibus-dp bus system (with cpu 31x-2 dp) s execution time of the s7 timer + s delay of the inputs and outputs this corresponds to the sum of the double cycle time and the delay of the inputs and outputs plus the double bus runtime. operating system processing time table 10-1 contains all the times needed to calculate the operating system processing times of the cpus. the times listed do not take account of s test functions, e.g. monitor, modify s functions: load block, delete block, compress block s communication table 10-1 operating system processing times of the cpus sequence cpu 312 ifm cpu 313 cpu 314 cpu 314 ifm cpu 315 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 316-2 dp cpu 318-2 cycle control 600 to 1200 m s 540 to 1040 m s 540 to 1040 m s 770 to 1340 m s 390 to 820 m s 500 to 1030 m s 500 to 1030 m s 200 to 340 ms process image update table 10-2 lists the cpu times for the process image update (process image transfer time). the times specified are aideal valueso which are prolonged by interrupts or by communication of the cpu. (process image = pi) the cpu time for the process image update is calculated as follows: k + number of bytes in the pi in rack a0o a + number of bytes in the pi in racks a1 to 3o b + number of bytes in the pi via dp d = process image transfer time
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table 10-2 process image update of cpus components cpu 312 ifm cpu 313 cpu 314 cpu 314 ifm cpu 315 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 316-2 dp cpu 318-2 k base load 162 m s 142 m s 142 m s 147 m s 109 m s 10 m s 10 m s 20 m s a for each byte in rack a0o 14.5 m s 13.3 m s 13.3 m s 13.6 m s 10.6 m s 20 m s (per word) 20 m s (per word) 6 m s b for each byte in racks a1 to 3o 16.5 m s 15.3 m s 15.3 m s 15.6 m s 12.6 m s 22 m s (per word) 22 m s (per word) 12.4 m s d for each byte in dp area for integrated dp interface 12 m s (per word) 12 m s (per word) 1 m s user program processing time: the user program processing time is made up of the sum of the execution times for the instructions and the sfb/sfcs called up. these execution times can be found in the instruction list. additionally, you must multiply the user program processing time by a cpu-specific factor. this factor is listed in table 10-3 for the individual cpus. table 10-3 cpu-specific factors for the user program processing time se- quence cpu 312 ifm cpu 313 cpu 314 cpu 314 ifm cpu 315 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 316-2 dp cpu 318-2 factor 1,23 1,19 1,15 1,15 1,15 1,19 1,19 1,025 s7 timers in the case of the cpu 318-2, the updating of the s7 timers does not extend the cycle time. the s7 timers are updated every 10 ms. you can find out in section 10.3 how to include the s7 timers in calculations of the cycle and response times. table 10-4 updating the s7 timers sequence 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315-2 dp 316-2 dp updating the s7 timers (every 10 ms) number of simulta- neously active s7 timers 10 m s number of simultaneously active s7 timers 8 m s
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 profibus-dp interface in the case of the cpu 315-2 dp/316-2 dp, the cycle time is typically extended by 5% when the profibus-dp interface is used. in the case of the cpu 318-2, there is no increase in cycle time when the profibus-dp interface is used. integrated functions in the case of the cpu 312-ifm and the cpu 314-ifm, the cycle time is increased by a maximum of 10 % when integrated functions are used. in addition, you must, where applicable, take into account the update of the instance db at the scan cycle checkpoint. table 10-5 shows the update times of the instance db at the scan cycle checkpoint, together with the corresponding sfb runtimes. table 10-5 update time and sfb runtimes cpu 312 ifm/314 ifm update time of the instance db at the scan cycle checkpoint sfb runtime if frequency measurement (sfb 30) 100 m s 220 m s if counting (sfb 29) 150 m s 300 m s if counting (parallel counter) (sfb 38) 100 m s 230 m s if positioning (sfb 39) 100 m s 150 m s delay of the inputs and outputs you must take account of the following delay times, depending on the module: s for digital inputs: the input delay time s for digital outputs: negligible delay times s for relay outputs: typical delay times of between 10 ms and 20 ms. the delay of the relay outputs depends, among other things, on the temperature and voltage. s for analog inputs: cycle time of the analog input s for analog outputs: response time of the analog output
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 bus runtimes in the profibus subnet when you have configured your profibus subnet using step 7 , step 7 will calculate the typical bus runtime to be expected. you can then display the bus runtime of your configuration on the programming device (see step 7 user manual ). an overview of the bus runtime is provided in figure 10-4. in this example, we assume that each dp slave has an average of 4 bytes of data. bus runtime number of dp slaves 6 ms 4 ms 2 ms 124816 32 transmission rate: 12 mbps transmission rate: 1.5 mbps 1 ms 3 ms 5 ms 7 ms min. slave interval 64 figure 10-4 overview of the bus runtime on profibus-dp at 1.5 mbps and 12 mbps if you run a profibus subnet with several masters, you must allow for the bus runtime of each master (i.e. total bus runtime = bus runtime number of masters).
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 extending the cycle by nesting interrupts table 10-6 shows typical extensions of the cycle time through nesting of an interrupt. the program runtime at the interrupt level must be added to these. if several interrupts are nested, the corresponding times need to be added. table 10-6 extending the cycle by nesting interrupts interrupts 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315-2 dp 316-2 dp 318-2 process interrupt approx. 840 m s approx. 700 m s approx. 700 m s approx. 730 m s approx. 480 m s approx. 590 m s approx. 590 m s approx. to 340ms diagnostic interrupt approx. 880 m s approx. 880 m s approx. 1000 m s approx. 700 m s approx. 860 m s approx. 860 m s approx. 450 m s time-of- day interrupt approx. 680 m s approx. 700 m s approx. 460 m s approx. 560 m s approx. 560 m s approx. 350 m s delay interrupt approx. 550 m s approx. 560 m s approx. 370 m s approx. 450 m s approx. 450 m s approx. 260 m s watchdog interrupt approx. 360 m s approx. 380 m s approx. 280 m s approx. 220 ms approx. 220 ms approx. 260 m s program- ming/ access error/ program execution error approx. 740 m s approx. 740 m s approx. 760 m s approx. 560 m s approx. 490 m s approx. 490 m s approx. 130/ 155/ 285 m s 10.3 calculation examples for cycle time and response time component parts of the cycle time remember: the cycle time consists of the following: s process image transfer time + s operating system processing time + s user program processing time + s processing time of s7 timers
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sample configuration 1 you have configured an S7-300 with the following modules on one rack: s 1 cpu 314 s 2 sm 321 di 32 dc 24 v digital input modules (4 bytes each in the pi) s 2 sm 322 do 32 dc 24 v/0.5a digital output modules (4 bytes each in the pi) according to the instruction list, the user program has a runtime of 1.5 ms. there is no communication. calculation in this example, the cycle time is calculated from the following times: s process image transfer time process image of the inputs: 147 m s + 8 bytes 13.6 m s = ca. 0.26 ms process image of the outputs: 147 m s + 8 bytes 13.6 m s = ca. 0.26 ms s operating system runtime cyclic control: approx. 1 ms s user program processing time: approx. 1.5 ms cpu-specific factor 1.15 = approx. 1.8 ms s processing time of s7 timers assumption: 30 s7 timers are in operation. for 30 s7 timers, the single update takes 30 8 ms = 240 m s. adding the process image transfer time, the operating system processing time and the user program processing time gives us the time interval: 0.26 ms + 0.26 ms + 1 ms + 1.8 ms = 3.32 ms. since the s7 timers are called every 10 ms, a maximum of one call can be made in this time interval, i.e. the cycle time can be increased through the s7 timers by a maximum of 240 m s. the cycle time is calculated from the sum of the listed times: cycle time = 0.26 ms + 0.26 ms + 1 ms + 1.8 ms + 0.024 ms = 3.34 ms
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 parts of the response time remember: the response time is the sum of the following: s 2 process image transfer time of the inputs + s 2 process image transfer time of the outputs + s 2 operating system processing time + s 2 program processing time + s processing time of the s7 timers + s delay times of the inputs and outputs tip: simple calculation: calculated cycle time 2 + delay times. for sample configuration 1 the following therefore applies: 3.34 ms 2 + delay timesi/o modules. sample configuration 2 you have configured an S7-300 with the following modules on two racks: s 1 cpu 314 s 4 sm 321 di 32 dc 24 v digital input modules (4 bytes each in the pi) s 3 sm 322 do 16 dc 24 v/0.5a digital output modules (2 bytes each in the process image) s 2 sm 331 ai 8 12bit analog input modules (not in the process image) s 2 sm 332 aoi 4 12bit analog output modules (not in the process image) user program according to the instruction list, the user program has a runtime of 2 ms. by taking into account the cpu-specific factor of 1.15, the resulting runtime is approx. 2.3 ms. the user program employs up to 56 s7 timers simultaneously. no activities are required at the scan cycle checkpoint. calculation in this example, the response time is calculated from the following times: s process image transfer time process image of the inputs: 147 m s + 16 bytes 13.6 m s = ca. 0.36 ms process image of the outputs: 147 m s + 6 bytes 13.6 m s = ca. 0.23 ms s operating system processing time cyclic control: approx. 1 ms s user program processing time: 2.3 ms
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 s 1st intermediate calculation the time base for calculating the processing time of the s7 timers is the sum of all previously listed times: 2 0.36 ms (process image transfer time of inputs) + 2 0.23 ms (process image transfer time of outputs) + 2 1 ms (operating system processing time) + 2 2.3 ms (user program processing time) [ 7.8 ms . s processing time of s7 timers a one-off update of 56 s7 timers takes 56 8 m s = 448 m s [ 0.45 ms. since the s7 timers are called every 10 ms, a maximum of one call can be made in the cycle time, i.e. the cycle time can be increased through the s7 timers by a maximum of 0.45 ms. s 2nd intermediate calculation: the response time excluding the delay times of the inputs and outputs is calculated from the sum of: 8.0 ms (result of the first subtotal) + 0.45 ms (processing time of the s7 timers) =8.45 ms . s delay times of the inputs and outputs the sm 321 di 32 dc 24 v digital input module has an input delay of 4.8 ms per channel. the output delay of the sm 322; do 16 dc 24 v/0.5a digital output group can be ignored. the sm 331; ai 8 12bit analog input module was parameterized for interference frequency suppression of 50 hz. this yields a conversion time of 22 ms per channel. since 8 channels are active, the cycle time for the analog input module is 176 ms . the sm 332; ao 4 12bit analog output module was parameterized for the measurement range 0 ...10v. the conversion time is 0.8 ms per channel. since 4 channels are active, a cycle time of 3.2 ms is obtained. a settling time of 0.1 ms for a resistive load must be added to this figure. this yields a response time of 3.3 ms for an analog output. s response times with delay times for inputs and outputs: s case 1: an output channel of the digital output module is set when a digital input signal is read in. this results in a response time of: response time = 4.8 ms + 8.45 ms = 13.25 ms . s case 2 an analog value is read in and an analog value is output. this results in a response time of: response time = 176 ms + 8.45 ms + 3.3 ms = 187.75 ms .
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 10.4 interrupt response time interrupt response time a definition the interrupt response time is the time that elapses between the first occurrence of an interrupt signal and the calling of the first instruction in the interrupt ob. the following rule generally applies: high-priority interrupts are executed first. this means the interrupt response time is increased by the program processing time of the higher-priority interrupt obs and the interrupt obs of equal priority that have not yet been executed. calculation the interrupt response time is calculated as follows: shortest interrupt response time = minimum interrupt response time of the cpu + minimum interrupt response time of the signal modules + bus runtime on the profibus-dp longest interrupt response time = maximum interrupt response time of the cpu + maximum interrupt response time of the signal modules + 2 bus runtime on the profibus-dp bus system process interrupt response time of the cpus table 10-7 lists the process interrupt response times of the cpus (without communication). table 10-7 process interrupt response times of the cpus cpu min. max. 312 ifm 0.6 ms 1.5 ms 313 0.5 ms 1.1 ms 314 0.5 ms 1.1 ms 314 ifm 0.5 ms 1.1 ms 315 0.3 ms 1.1 ms 315-2 dp 0.4 ms 1.1 ms 316-2 dp 0.4 ms 1.1 ms 318-2 0.23 ms 0.41 ms
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 diagnostic interrupt response times of the cpus table 10-8 lists the diagnostic interrupt response times of the cpus (without communication). table 10-8 diagnostic interrupt response times of the cpus cpu min. max. 312 ifm 313 0.6 ms 1.3 ms 314 0.6 ms 1.3 ms 314 ifm 0.7 ms 1.3 ms 315 0.5 ms 1.3 ms 315-2 dp 0.6 ms 1.3 ms 316-2 dp 0.6 ms 1.3 ms 318-2 0.32 ms 0.52 ms signal modules the process interrupt response time of the signal modules is composed of the following components: s digital input modules process interrupt response time = internal interrupt preparation time + input delay you will find the times in the data sheet for the individual analog input module. s analog input modules process interrupt response time = internal interrupt preparation time + conversion time the internal interrupt preparation time for the analog input modules is negligible. the conversion times can be found in the data sheet for the individual digital input modules. the diagnostic interrupt response time of the signal modules is the time that elapses between the detection of a diagnostic event by the signal module and the triggering of the diagnostics interrupt by the signal module. this time is negligible. process interrupt handling process interrupt handling begins when the process interrupt ob 40 is called. higher-priority interrupts cause the process interrupt handling routine to be interrupted. direct accesses to the i/o are made at the execution time of the instruction. when the process interrupt handling routine has finished, either cyclic program execution continues or further same-priority or lower-priority interrupt obs are called up and executed.
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 10.5 calculation example for the interrupt response time parts of the interrupt response time remember: the process interrupt response time consists of the following: s the process interrupt response time of the cpu and s the process interrupt response time of the signal module. example: you have configured an S7-300 with a cpu 314 and four digital modules. one digital input module is the sm 321; di 16 dc 24v; with process and diagnostic interrupt. you have only enabled the process interrupt when setting the parameters for the cpu and the sm. you decided not to use time-controlled processing, diagnostics or error handling. you configured an input delay of 0.5 ms for the digital input module. no activities are necessary at the scan cycle checkpoint. there is no communication via the mpi. calculation the process interrupt response time in this example is calculated from the following times: s process interrupt response time of the cpu 314: approx. 1.1 ms s process interrupt response time of the sm 321; di 16 dc 24v: internal interrupt preparation time: 0.25 ms input delay 0.5 ms the process interrupt response time is calculated from the sum of the listed times: process interrupt response time = 1.1 ms + 0.25 ms + 0.5 ms = approx. 1.85 ms . this process interrupt response time elapses from the time a signal is applied to the digital input until the first instruction in ob 40. 10.6 reproducibility of delay and watchdog interrupts reproducibility a definition delay interrupt: the interval between the call-up of the first instruction in the ob and the programmed time of the interrupt. watchdog interrupt: the fluctuation of the time interval between two successive call-ups, measured in each case between the first instruction in the ob.
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-17 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 reproducibility table 10-9 lists reproducibility of the delay and watchdog interrupts of the cpus (without communication). table 10-9 reproducibility of the delay and watchdog interrupts of the cpus cpu reproducibility delay interrupt watchdog interrupt 314 approx. 1/+0.4 ms approx. $ 0.2 ms 314 ifm approx. 1/+0.4 ms approx. $ 0.2 ms 315 approx. 1/+0.4 ms approx. $ 0.2 ms 315-2 dp approx. 1/+0.4 ms approx. $ 0.2 ms 316-2 dp approx. 1/+0.4 ms approx. $ 0.2 ms 318-2 approx. 0.8/+0.34 ms approx. $ 0.05 ms
cycle and response times of the S7-300 10-18 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
11-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version in this chapter in this chapter we describe the functional differences between the various cpu versions. these differences are determined by the following factors: s by the performance features of the cpus, especially the cpu 318-2 in comparison with other cpus. s by functionality of the cpus described in this manual in comparison to previous versions. section contents page 11.1 the differences between the cpu 318-2 and the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp 11-2 11.2 the differences between the cpus and their previous versions 11-4 11
cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 11.1 the differences between the cpu 318-2 and the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp 4 accumulators cpu 318-2 cpus 312 ifm to 316-2 dp 4 accumulators 2 accumulators the following table shows you what to watch for if you want to use an stl user program of a cpu 312 ifm to a cpu 316-2 dp for the cpu 318-2. instructions user program from the cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp for the cpu 318 integer math instructions (+d, d, *d, /d, mod) the cpu 318 transfers the contents of accumulators 3 and 4 to accumulators 2 and 3 after these operations. if accumulator 2 is evaluated in the (accepted) user program, you now receive incorrect values with the cpu 318-2 because the value has been overwritten by the contents of accumulator 3. configuration the cpu 318-2 only accepts a project from a cpu 312 ifm to 316-2 dp if it has been created for these cpus with step 7 v 5.x. you cannot use programs that contain configuration data for fms (fm 353/354, for example) or cps (sdb 1xxx) for the cpu 318-2. you must revise or recreate the relevant project. starting a timer in the user program if you start a timer in the user program (with si t, for example), there must be a number in bcd format in the accumulator of the cpu 318-2. global data status cpu 318-2 cpus 312ifm to 316-2dp you can specify the global data status from the memory marker/data area. you can specify the global data status from the i/o area and the memory marker/data area.
cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 mpi addressing cpu 318-2 cpus 312 ifm to 316-2 dp the cpu addresses the mpi nodes within its configuration (fm/cp) via the module start address . if fm/cp are in the central configuration of an S7-300 with their own mpi address, the cpu forms its own communication bus (via the backplane bus) with the fm/cp, separate from the other subnets. the mpi address of the fm/cp is no longer relevant for the nodes of other subnets. communication to the fm/cp takes place via the cpu mpi address. the cpus address the mpi nodes within their configuration via the mpi address . if fm/cp are in the central configuration of an S7-300 with their own mpi address, the fm/cp and cpu mpi nodes are in the same cpu subnet. you have an S7-300 configuration with fm/cp addressed via the mpi and want to replace the cpu 312 ifm ... 316 with a cpu 318-2. figure 11-1 on page 11-3 shows an example. op 25 rs 485 repeater S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 S7-300 with cpu 316 op 25 pg pg fm fm the cpu 316 is replaced with a cpu 318-2 fm figure 11-1 sample configuration
cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 after the cpus have been swapped, you must proceed as follows (based on the above example): s replace the cpu 316 with the cpu 318-2 in the step 7 project. s reconfigure the operator panel/programming device. this means reallocating the programmable controller and reassigning the destination address (= mpi address of the cpu 318-2 and the slot of the relevant fm) s reconfigure the configuration data for the fm/cp to be loaded onto the cpu. this is necessary to ensure that the fm/cp in this configuration remain accessible to the operator panel/programming device. 11.2 the differences between the cpus 312 ifm to 316 and their previous versions memory cards and backing up firmware on memory card as of the following cpus: cpu order no. as of version firmware hardware cpu 313 6es7 313-1ad 03- 0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 314 6es7 314-1ae 04- 0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 315 6es7 315-1af 03- 0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 315-2 6es7 315-2af 03- 0ab0 1.0.0 01 cpu 316-2 6es7 316-1ag 00- 0ab0 1.0.0 01 you can: s insert the 16 bit-wide memory cards: 256 kb feprom 6es7 951-1kh00-0aa0 1 mb feprom 6es7 951-1kk00-0aa0 2 mb feprom 6es7 951-1kl00-0aa0 4 mb feprom 6es7 951-1km00-0aa0 s back up the cpu firmware on memory card
cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 mpi addressing you have a cpu as of order number and version: you have a cpu as of order number and version: 6es7 312-5ac01-0ab0, version 01 6es7 313-1ad02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 314-1ae03-0ab0, version 01 6es7 314-5ae02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 315-1af02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 315-2af02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 316-1ag00-0ab0, version 01 and step 7 as of v4.02 and step 7 < v4.02 the cpu accepts the mpi addresses configured by you in step 7 for the relevant cp/fm in an S7-300 or automatically determines the mpi address of the cp/fm in an S7-300 on the pattern mpi addr. cpu; mpi addr.+1 mpi addr.+2 etc. the cpu automatically establishes the mpi address of the cp/fm in an S7-300 on the pattern mpi addr. cpu;mpi addr.+1 mpi addr.+2 etc. mpi addr. mpi addr. axo mpi addr. azo cpu cp cp mpi addr. mpi addr.+1 mpi addr.+2 cpu cp cp mpi with 19.2 kbps with step 7 as of v4.02 you can set a transmission rate for the mpi of 19.2 kbps. the cpus support 19.2 kbps as of the following order numbers: 6es7 312-5ac01-0ab0, version 01 6es7 313-1ad02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 314-1ae03-0ab0, version 01 6es7 314-5ae02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 315-1af02-0ab0, version 01 6es7 315-2af02-0ab0, version 01
cpu functions dependent on the cpu and step 7 version 11-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 315-2 dp cpu 315-2 dp v 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 and step 7 < v 5.x as of 6es7 315-2af03-0ab0 and step 7 as of v 5.x direct communication no yes equidistance no yes activation/deactivation of dp slaves no yes routing no yes reading out of slave diagnosis see figure 9-1 on page 9-6 see figure 9-2 on page 9-7
12-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 tips and tricks behavior of the hardware clock when the power is off the following table shows the behavior of the clock when the power of the cpu is off, depending on the backup: backup clock behavior with backup battery the clock continues to operate in power off mode. with accumulator the clock continues to operate in power off mode for the backup time of the accumulator. in power on mode, the accumulator is recharged. in the event of backup failure, no error message is generated. at power on, the clock continues to operate using the clock time at which power off took place. none at power on, the clock continues to operate using the clock time at which power off took place. since the cpu is not backed up, the clock does not continue at power off. tip on the amonitoring time for ...o parameter in step 7 if you are not sure of the required times in the S7-300, parameterize the highest values for the parameters of amonitoring time for s transfer of parameters to moduleso s ready message from moduleso cpu 31x-2 dp is dp master cpu 318-2 is dp master you can also set power-up time monitoring for the dp slaves with the atransfer of parameters to moduleso parameter. you can set power-up time monitoring for the dp slaves with both of the above parameters. this means that the dp slaves must be powered up and parameterized by the cpu (as dp master) in the set time. 12
tips and tricks 12-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 fm in a distributed configuration in an et 200m (cpu 31x-2 is dp master) if you use the fm 353/354/355 in an et 200m with the im 153-2 and remove and insert the fm in the et 200m, then you must subsequently turn the power supply of the et 200m off and on. the reason for this is that the cpu does not write the new parameters into the fm until power of the et 200m is switched on. the retentive feature of data blocks you must note the following for the retentivity of data areas in data blocks: with backup battery without backup battery cpu program on memory card or in the integral eprom of the 312 ifm/314 ifm memory card not plugged in all dbs are retentive, whatever parameterization has been performed. the dbs generated using sfc 22 acreat_dbo are also tti all dbs (retentive, non-retentive) are transferred from the memory card or from the integral eprom into ram on restart. the dbs parameterized as retentive retain their contents retentive. s the dbs or data areas generated using sfc 22 acreat_dbo are not retentive. s after a power failure, the retentive data areas are retained. note: these data areas are stored in the cpu, not on the memory card. the non-retentive data areas contain whatever has been programmed on eprom. watchdog interrupt: periodicity > 5 ms for the watchdog interrupt, you should set periodicity > 5 ms. in the case of lower values, the danger of frequent occurrence of watchdog interrupt errors increases depending on, for example, the s program execution time of an ob 35 program s frequency and program execution time of higher priority classes s programming device functions. process interrupt of i/o modules in the case of process interrupt-critical applications, insert the process interrupt-triggering modules as near as possible to the cpu. the reason for this is that an interrupt is read most quickly by rack 0, slot 4 and then in ascending order of the slots.
a-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 standards, certificates and approvals introduction this appendix provides the following information on the S7-300 modules and components: s the most important standards and criteria met by S7-300 and s approvals that have been granted for the S7-300. iec 1131 the S7-300 programmable controller meets the requirements and criteria to standard iec 1131, part 2. ce symbol our products meet the requirements and protection guidelines of the following ec directives and comply with the harmonized european standards (en) issued in the official journal of the european communities with regard to programmable controllers: s 89/336/eec aelectromagnetic compatibilityo (emc directive) s 73/23/eec aelectrical equipment designed for use between certain voltage limitso (low-voltage directive) the declarations of conformity are held at the address below, where they can be obtained if and when required by the respective authorities: siemens aktiengesellschaft automation group a&d as e 4 p.o. box 1963 d-92209 amberg federal republic of germany a
standards, certificates and approvals a-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 emc guidelines simatic products have been designed for use in the industrial area. they can also be used in residential environments (residential, commercial and light industry) with individual approval. you must acquire the individual approval from the respective national authority or testing body. in germany individual approval is granted by the bundesamt fr post und telekommunikation and its associated offices. area of application requirements: emitted interference immunity industry en 50081-2 : 1993 en 50082-2 : 1995 domestic individual approval en 50082-1 : 1992 ul recognition ul recognition mark underwriters laboratories (ul) to ul standard 508, report 116536 csa certification csa certification mark canadian standard association (csa) to standard c22.2 no. 142, file no. lr 48323 fm approval fm approval to factory mutual approval standard class number 3611, class i, division 2, group a, b, c, d. ! warning personal injury or property damage can result. in hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you withdraw any connectors while an S7-300 is in operation. always isolate the S7-300 in hazardous areas before withdrawing connectors.
standards, certificates and approvals a-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 pno cpu certificate no. as ... dp master dp slave 315-2 dp z00349 z00258 316-2 dp 318-2
standards, certificates and approvals a-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
b-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 obs in this appendix in this appendix you will find an overview of which organization blocks can be executed in which cpu. the operating system of the cpu is designed for event-controlled user program processing. the following table shows which organization blocks (obs) the operating system invokes in response to which events. you can find a detailed description of the obs in the step 7 online help system. obs for ... possible start events excep- tions cycle ob 1 cycle 1101 h 1103 h ob1 starting event running ob1 start event (conclusion of the free cycle) ob 90 background ob 1191 h 1192 h 1193 h 1195 h ob 90 initiated by... restart deletion of a block transfer of a block in run mode ob 90 start event only 318-2 start-up ob 100 start-up at stop-run transition 1381 h 1382 h manual restart requests automatic restart requests ob 102 cold start 1385 h 1386 h manual cold-start request automatic cold-start request only 318-2 b
obs b-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 obs for ... excep- tions possible start events inter- rupts ob 10 time-of-day interrupt 1111 h time-of-day interrupt event not 312 ifm ob 11 1112 h only: 318-2 ob 20 delay interrupt 1121 h delay interrupt event not 312 ifm ob 21 1122 h only: 318-2 ob 32 watchdog interrupt 1133 h watchdog interrupt event only: 318-2 ob 35 1136 h not 312 ifm ob 40 process interrupt 1141 h process interrupt ob 41 1141 h only: 318-2 ob 82 diagnostic interrupt 3842 h 3942 h module o. k. module fault not 312 ifm error re- sponses ob 80 timing error 3501 h 3502 h 3505 h 3507 h cycle time violation ob or fb request error time-of-day interrupt elapsed due to time jump multiple ob request error caused start info buffer overflow not 312 ifm ob 81 power supply error 3822 h 3922 h baf: backup voltage returns to cpu baf: no backup voltage in cpu not 312 ifm ob 85 program execution error 35a1 h 35a3 h 39b1 h 39b2 h no ob or fb error during access of a block by the operating system i/o access error during process image updating of the inputs i/o access error during transfer of the process image to the output modules not 312 ifm ob 86 station failure in profibus-dp subnet ??? only cpu 31x-2 dp ob 87 communication error 35e1 h 35e2 h 35e6 h incorrect frame identifier in gd gd packet status cannot be entered in db gd whole status cannot be entered in db not 312 ifm
obs b-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 obs for ... excep- tions possible start events error respons es ob 121 programming error 2521 h 2522 h 2523 h 2524 h 2525 h 2526 h 2527 h 2528 h 2529 h 2530 h 2531 h 2532 h 2533 h 2534 h 2535 h 253a h 253c h 253e h bcd conversion error range length error during reading range length error during writing range error during reading range error during writing timer number error counter number error alignment error during reading alignment error during writing write error during access to db write error during access to di block number error opening a db block number error opening a di block number error at fc call block number error at fb call db not loaded fc not loaded fb not loaded not 312 ifm ob 122 i/o direct access error 2944 h 2945 h i/o access error at nth read access (n > 1) i/o access error at nth write access (n > 1) not 312 ifm
obs b-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 ob 121 and 122 (special features in the cpus 313 to 316-2 dp) please note the following special feature of the S7-300 (except in the cpu 312 ifm/318-2) with obs 121 and 122: note please note the following special features with obs 121 and 122: the cpu enters in the obs' local data value a0o in the following temporary variables of the variable declaration table: s byte no. 3: ob121_blk_type or ob122_blk_type (type of the block in which the error has occurred) s byte nos. 8 and 9: ob121_blk_num or ob122_blk_num (number of the block in which the error has occurred) s byte nos. 10 and 11: ob121_prg_addr or ob122_prg_addr (address of the block in which the error has occurred)
c-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions introduction the cpus provide you with various system functions, for example, for program handling and diagnostics. you invoke these system functions in your user program with the number of the sfc or sfb. iec functions, which you can call from your user program, are integrated in step 7 . you can find a detailed description of all sfcs, sfbs and iec functions in the step 7 online help system . contents this appendix shows the execution times for the sfcs/sfbs and for each iec function. the execution times depend on the cpu used. appendix contents page c.1 sfcs and sfbs c-2 c.2 iec timers and iec counters c-8 c.3 iec functions c-8 c
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 c.1 sfcs and sfbs sfc no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 0 set_clk sets the clock time 290 240 240 137 1 read_clk reads the clock time 205 190 185 28 2 set_rtm sets the operating hours counter 65 60 21 3 ctrl_rtm starts/stops the operating hours counter 55 55 21 4 read_rtm reads the operating hours counter 90 80 24 5 gadr_lgc reads the free address of the channel x of the si- gnal module on module slot y . 170 38 6 rd_sinfo reads the start informa- tion of the current ob. 180 150 120 34 7 dp_pral triggers a process inter- rupt from the user pro- gram of the cpu as dp slave through to dp ma- ster. 100 29 11 syc_fr synchronizes outputs on the profibus-dp bus 124 +2.1* 12 d_act_dp activates or deactivates dp slaves 13 dpnrm_dg reads the dp-compliant slave diagnosis 180 97 14 dprd_dat reads consistent data from dp standard slaves with a dp standard identi- fier > 4 bytes 180 47 15 dpwr_dat writes consistent data from dp standard slaves with a dp standard identi- fier > 4 bytes 180 47 17 alarm_sq generates a message and sends it to display devices. the message can be acknowledged by the display device. 310 250 74 * m s per request
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sfc no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 18 alarm_s generates a message and sends it to a display device. the message is always acknowledged. 310 250 74 19 alarm_sc determines the acknow- ledgment state, the last alarm_sq received message and the state of the message-initiating si- gnal at the last call-up of the sfc 17 aalarm_sqo or the sfc 18 aalarm_so. 130 110 56 20 blkmov copies variables of ran- dom type 105 +2* 90+2* 75+2* 43 + 0.17* 21 fill sets array default varia- bles 105 +3.2 * 90+3.2* 75+2* 45 + 0.12* 22 creat_db generates a data block of specified length in a spe- cified area 126 +3.5 ** 110+3.5** 100+3.5** 27 23 del_db deletes a data block 22 24 test_db tests a data block 134 98 110 108 126 134 30 25 compress compresses a user pro- gram 22 26 updat_pi updates process image of the inputs 32 + 4.2*** 27 updat_po updates process image of the outputs 30 + 3.5*** 28 set_tint sets the times of a time- of-day interrupt 190 190 51 29 can_tint cancels the times of a time-of-day interrupt 50 50 22 30 act_tint activates a time-of-day interrupt 50 50 19 31 qry_tint queries the status of a time-of-day interrupt 85 75 30 32 srt_dint starts a delay interrupt 85 80 45 33 can_dint cancels a delay interrupt 50 50 29 * m s per byte ** m s per db in stated area *** m s per module
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sfc no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 34 qry_dint queries started delay in- terrupts 80 80 32 36 msk_flt masks sync faults 185 150 110 21 37 dmsk_flt enables sync faults 205 160 130 23 38 read_err reads and erases pro- gramming and access er- rors that have occurred or have been disabled 205 160 115 23 39 dis_irt disables the handling of new interrupts 300 215 200 42 40 en_irt enables the handling of new interrupt events 490 305 280 42 41 dis_airt delays the handling of in- terrupts 55 35 35 18 42 en_airt enables the handling of interrupts 55 35 35 18 43 re_trigr re-triggers the scan time monitor 40 30 30 98 44 repl_val copies a substitute value into accumulator 1 of the level causing the error 45 45 20 46 stp forces the cpu into the stop mode 47 wait implements waiting times 200 200 200 5 48 snc_rtcb sychronizes slave clocks 17 49 lgc_gadr converts a free address to the slot and rack for a module 140 140 140 38 50 rd_lgadr reads all the declared free addresses for a mo- dule 190 190 190 77 51 rdsysst reads out the information from the system state list sfc 51 is not interrupti- ble through interrupts. 350 +10 *** 280+10*** 270+10*** 150 52 wr_ usmsg writes specific diagnostic information in the diagno- stic buffer 140 110 110 82 54 rd_dparm reads predefined dyna- mic parameters from a module 1300 1300 1300 116 55 wr_parm writes dynamic parame- ters to a module 1000 1600 1600 118
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sfc no. execution time in m s description name 318- 2 316- 2 dp 315- 2 dp 315 314 ifm 314 313 312 ifm 56 wr_dparm writes predefined dyna- mic parameters to a mo- dule 1600 1750 1750 101 57 parm_mod assigns a module's para- meters 1920 2200 2200 87 58 wr_rec writes a module-specific data record 1400 +32 * 1400+32 1400+32 720+ 15* 59 rd_rec reads a module-specific data record 500 500 500 810+ 15* 60 gd_snd programmed transmis- sion of a gd packet 200+ 9.4* 61 gd_rcv programmed acceptance of a gd packet 56 64 time_tick reads out the system time you can read out the sy- stem time with an accuracy in the ms range. 56 45 45 18 65 x_send sends data to a commu- nication partner external to your own s7 station. 510 420 310 300 66 x_rcv receives data from a communication partner external to your own s7 station. 190 160 120 220 67 x_get reads data from a com- munication partner exter- nal to your own s7 sta- tion. the communication partner has no associa- ted sfc. 310 250 190 130+ 8.3* 68 x_put writes data to a commu- nication partner outside your own s7 station. the communication partner has no associated sfc. 310 250 190 130+ 8.3* 69 x_abort aborts an existing con- nection to a communica- tion partner external to your own s7 station. 150 120 100 138 * m s per byte *** m s per byte of a data record
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 sfc no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 72 i_get reads data from a com- munication partner within your own s7 station. 300 250 190 140+ 9.8* 73 i_put writes data to a commu- nication partner within your own s7 station. 300 250 190 150+ 10.6* 74 i_abort aborts an existing con- nection to a communica- tion partner within your own s7 station. 150 120 100 138 79 set sets a bit field in the i/o area 56 80 rset deletes a bit field in the i/o area 56 81 ublkmov consistent data transmis- sion with put/get 42 + 0.17* * m s per byte
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 functions for the integrated inputs/outputs (only 312 ifm and 314 ifm) the cpus 312 ifm and 314 ifm provide the following system functions for the special channels of the onboard i/o: the sfbs 29, 30, 38 and 39 are described in the integrated functions manual. the sfbs 41, 42 and 43 are described in the step 7 system and standard functions reference manual. sfb- no. name description execution time in ms 312 ifm 314 ifm 29 hs_count counts pulses at the special inputs of the inte- grated inputs/outputs approx. 300 approx. 300 30 freq_mes measures frequency via a special input of the integrated inputs/outputs approx. 220 approx. 220 38 hsc_a_b counts pulses with 2 counters a and b at the special inputs of the integrated inputs/outputs approx. 230 39 pos controlled positioning of axes in cooperation with the user program approx. 150 41 cont_c continuous control approx. 3300 42 cont_s step control approx. 2800 43 pulsegen pulse generation approx. 1500 implementation of a sequence processor sfb no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 32 drum implements a sequence processor with a maxi- mum of 16 sequences. 480 360 300 33
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 c.2 iec timers and iec counters sfb no. name description execution time in m s 312 ifm 313 314 314 ifm 315 315- 2 dp 316- 2 dp 318- 2 iec timers 3 tp generates a pulse of du- ration pt. 140 100 90 23 4 ton delays a leading edge of duration pt. 140 100 90 23 5 tof delays of falling edge of duration pt. 145 100 90 18 iec counters 0 ctu counts up. the counter is increased by 1 for each leading edge. 120 80 70 16 1 ctd counts down. the coun- ter is decreased by 1 for each leading edge. 120 80 70 16 2 ctud counts up and count down. 150 95 80 19 c.3 iec functions you can use the following functions in step 7: fc no. name description execution time in m s date_and_time 3 d_tod_dt concatenates the data formats date and time_of_day (tod) and convert to data format date_and_time. approx. 680 6 dt_date extracts the date data format from the date_and_time data format. approx. 230 7 dt_day extracts the day of the week from the data format date_and_time. approx. 230 8 dt_tod extracts the time_of_day data format from the date_and_time data format. approx. 200
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 fc no. name description execution time in m s time formats 33 s5ti_tim converts s5 time data format to time data format approx. 80 40 tim_s5ti converts time data format to s5 time data format approx. 160 duration 1 ad_dt_tm adds a duration in the time format to a time in the dt format. the result is a new time in the dt format. 750 35 sb_dt_tm subtracts a duration in the time format from a time in the dt format. the result is a new time in the dt format. 750 34 sb_dt_dt subtracts two times in the dt format. the result is a duration in the time format. 700 compare date_and_time 9 eq_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for equal to. 190 12 ge_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for greater than or equal to. 190 14 gt_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for greater than. 190 18 le_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for less than or equal to. 190 23 lt_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for less than. 190 28 ne_dt compares the contents of two variables in the date_and_time format for not equal to. 190 compare string 10 eq_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for equal to. 150+ (n 32) 13 ge_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for greater than or equal to. 150+ (n 32) 15 gt_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for greater than. 140+ (n 38) 19 le_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for less than or equal to. 150+ (n 32) l, p = block parameters (if 1 + p = 0, then the execution time l + p = 254 m s) n = number of characters k = number of characters in parameter in1
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 fc no. execution time in m s description name 24 lt_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for less than. 140+ (n 38) 29 ne_strng compares the contents of two variables in the string format for not equal to. 150+ (n 32) string variable processing 21 len reads the length of a string variable. 90 20 left reads the first l characters of a string variable. 150+ (l 26) 32 right reads the last l characters of a string variable. 150+ (l 26) 26 mid reads the middle l characters of a string variable (starting at the defined character). 150+ (l 26) 2 concat concatenates two string variables in one string variable. 180+ (n 28) 17 insert inserts a string variable into another string variable at a defined point. 250+ (n 26) 4 delete deletes l characters of a string variable. 300+ ((l + p) 27) 31 replace replaces l characters of a string variable with a second string variable. 300+ ((l + p) 27) 11 find finds the position of the second string variable in the first string variable. k 50 format conversions with string 16 i_strng converts a variable from integer format to string format. 1110 5 di_strng converts a variable from integer (32-bit) format to string format. 1500 30 r_strng converts a variable from real format to string format. 1720 38 strng_i converts a variable from string format to integer format. 500 37 strng_di converts a variable from string format to integer (32-bit) format. 840 39 strng_r converts a variable from string format to real format. 200 number processing 22 limit limits a number to a defined limit value. 450 25 max selects the largest of three numeric varia- bles. 430 l, p = block parameters (if 1 + p = 0, then the execution time l + p = 254 m s) n = number of characters k = number of characters in parameter in1
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 fc no. execution time in m s description name 27 min selects the smallest of three numeric varia- bles. 430 36 sel selects one of two variables. 320 l, p = block parameters (if 1 + p = 0, then the execution time l + p = 254 m s) n = number of characters k = number of characters in parameter in1
execution times of the sfcs/sfbs and iec functions c-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
d-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 system status list in the cpus introduction the cpu is able to provide you, the S7-300 user, with certain information. the cpu stores this information in the asystem status listo. in this appendix you will find the sublists of the system state list made available by the cpus. reading the system state list you can use sfc 51 ardsyssto to read the entries in the system status list from the user program (see the step 7 online help system ). listing the sublists table c-1 below shows the individual sublists of the system status list with the entries relevant for the individual cpus. table d-1 sublists of the system status list of the cpus szl_id sublist index (= id of the in- dividual re- cords of the sublist) record contents (sublist excerpt) remarks 0111 h cpu identification one record of the sublist 0001 h cpu type and version number 0012 h 0112 h 0f12 h cpu features all records of the sublist only those records of a group of features header information only 0000 h 0100 h 0300 h step 7 processing time system in the cpu step 7 operation set 0013 h user memory areas work memory d
system status list in the cpus d-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table d-1 sublists of the system status list of the cpus, continued szl_id remarks record contents (sublist excerpt) index (= id of the in- dividual re- cords of the sublist) sublist 0014 h operating system areas process image of the inputs (number in bytes) process image of the outputs (number in bytes) number of memory markers number of timers number of counters size of the i/o address area entire local data area of the cpu (in bytes) 0015 h block types all records of the sublist obs (number and size) dbs (number and size) sdbs (number and size) fcs (number and size) fbs (number and size) 0019 h 0f19 h state of module leds status of each led header information only 0132 h communications status information on the communications type specified 0001 h 0005 h 0008 h number and type of connections diagnostics status data time system, correction factor, operating hours counter, date/time of day 0222 h interrupt status ; record for the specified interrupt ob number 0232 h cpu protection level 0004 h cpu protection level and position of the key switch 0692 h status information of module rack for all racks of an S7-300 _ ok status of individual racks
system status list in the cpus d-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table d-1 sublists of the system status list of the cpus, continued szl_id remarks record contents (sublist excerpt) index (= id of the in- dividual re- cords of the sublist) sublist 0d91 h module status information of all modules in the specified rack (all cpus) 0000 h 0001 h 0002 h 0003 h features/parameters of the module plugged in rack 0 rack 1 rack 2 rack 3 00a0 h 01a0 h diagnostic buffer all entered event information the x latest information entries event information the information in each case depends on the event 00b1 h 00b2 h 00b3 h module diagnostics data record 0 of the module diagnostics information complete module-dependent record of the module diagnostics information complete module-dependent record of the module diagnostics information module starting address module rack and slot number module starting address module-dependent diagnostics information
system status list in the cpus d-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 profibus-dp sublists below you will find a list of the sublists that the cpu 315-2 dp can evaluate in its role as dp master or dp slave in addition to those listed in table d-2. table d-2 sublists of the system status list of the cpu 315-2 dp as dp master szl_id sublist index (= id of the in- dividual re- cords of the sublist) record contents (sublist excerpt) remarks 0a91 h 0c91 h module status information in the cpu status information of all dp subsystems and dp masters module status information of a module module starting address features/parameters of the module plugged in not 318-2 0d91 h module status information in the station named (for cpu 315-2 dp) xxyy h all modules of station yy in the dp subnet xx as dp slave: status data for transfer memory areas 0092 h 0292 h 0692 h status information of module rack or stations in dp network target status of racks in central configuration or of stations in a subnet actual status of racks in central configuration or of stations in a subnet ok status of expansion racks in central configuration or of stations in a subnet 0000 h subnet id information on the state of the mounting rack in the central configuration information of status of stations in subnet 00b4 h module diagnostics all standard diagnostic data of a station (only with dp master) module start address (diagnostic address) module-dependent diagnostic information
e-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 dimensioned drawings introduction in this appendix you will find dimensioned drawings of the cpus for the S7-300. you need the specifications in these drawings in order to dimension the S7-300 configuration. the dimensioned drawings of the other S7-300 modules and components are contained in the module specifications reference manual. cpu 312 ifm figure e-1 shows the dimensioned drawing of the cpu 312 ifm. 130 120 80 43 23 125 130 9 25 195 with front door open figure e-1 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 312 ifm e
dimensioned drawings e-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp figure e-2 shows the dimensioned drawing of the cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp. the dimensions are the same for all the cpus listed. their appearance can differ (see chapter 8). for example, the cpu 315-2 dp has two led strips. 125 130 120 180 80 figure e-2 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 313/314/315/315-2 dp/316-2 dp
dimensioned drawings e-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 318-2 figure e-3 shows the dimensioned drawing of the cpu 318-2, front view. the side view is illustrated in figure e-2 125 160 figure e-3 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 318-2 cpu 314 ifm, front view figure e-4 shows the dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, front view. the side view is shown in figure e-5. 125 160 figure e-4 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, front view
dimensioned drawings e-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 314 ifm, side view figure e-5 shows the dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, side view. 130 120 180 figure e-5 dimensioned drawing of the cpu 314 ifm, side view
f-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) introduction in this appendix, we explain s what is meant by aelectrostatic sensitive deviceso s the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensitive devices. contents this chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices: section contents page f. 1 what is esd? f-2 f. 2 electrostatic charging of persons f-3 f. 3 general protective measures against electrostatic discharge damage f-4 f
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) f-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 f.1 what is esd? definition all electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ics or components. due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. these e lectrostatic s ensitive d evices have the internationally recognized shortformesd . electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol: ! caution electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. these voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. in most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation.
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) f-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 f.2 electrostatic charging of persons charging every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically. figure f-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages to which a person can be exposed by coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. these values are in conformity with the specifications of iec 801-2. voltage in kv 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (kv) 510 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 relative air humidity in % 1 3 1 synthetic material 2 wool 3 antistatic material, for example, wood or concrete 2 figure f-1 electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person
guidelines for handling electrostatic sensitive devices (esd) f-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 f.3 general protective measures against electrostatic discharge damage ensuring sufficient grounding make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. you thus avoid electrostatic charging. avoiding direct contact you should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. in this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. if you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. use grounded measuring devices only.
g-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 replacement parts and accessories for the cpus of the S7-300 replacement parts table g-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for the cpus of the S7-300 programmable controllers. table g-1 accessories and replacement parts S7-300 parts order no. acces- sories re- place- ment parts bus connector 6es7 390-0aa00-0aa0 x power connector between power supply unit and cpu 6es7 390-7ba00-0aa0 x 2 key for cpu (for mode selector) 6es7 911-0aa00-0aa0 x backup battery 6es7 971-1aa00-0aa0 x accumulator for real-time clock 6es7 971-5bb00-0aa0 x memory card 5 v - feprom s 16 kb s 32 kb s 64 kb s 128 kb s 256 kb s 512 kb s 1 mb s 2 mb s 4 mb 5 v ram s 128 kb s 256 kb s 512 kb s 1 mb s 2 mb 6es7 951-0kd00-0aa0 6es7 951-0ke00-0aa0 6es7 951-0kf00-0aa0 6es7 951-0kg00-0aa0 6es7 951-1kh00-0aa0 6es7 951-0kj00-0aa0 6es7 951-1kk00-0aa0 6es7 951-1kl00-0aa0 6es7 951-1km00-0aa0 6es7 951-0kg00-0aa0 6es7 951-1ah00-0aa0 6es7 951-1aj00-0aa0 6es7 951-1ak00-0aa0 6es7 951-1al00-0aa0 x labeling strip (qty 10) 6es7 392-2xx00-0aa0 x slot numbering label 6es7 912-0aa00-0aa0 x g
replacement parts and accessories for the cpus of the S7-300 g-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table g-1 accessories and replacement parts, continued S7-300 parts re- place- ment parts acces- sories order no. 20-pin front connector s screw terminals s spring-loaded terminals 40-pin front connector s screw terminals s spring-loaded terminals 6es7 392-1aj00-0aa0 6es7 392-1bj00-0aa0 6es7 392-1am00-0aa0 6es7 392-1bm01-0aa0 x x shield contact element 6es7 390-5aa00-0aa0 x shield terminals for s 2 cables with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm (0.08 to 0.23 in.) each s 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm (0.12 to 0.31 in.) s 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm (0.16 to 0.51 in.) 6es7 390-5ab00-0aa0 6es7 390-5ba00-0aa0 6es7 390-5ca00-0aa0 x instruction list 6es7 398-8aa03-8an0 x
h-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 simatic s7 reference literature introduction this appendix contains references s to manuals that you require for configuring and programming the S7-300, s to manuals describing the components of a profibus-dp network, s to technical books providing information beyond the S7-300, manuals on configuration and commissioning comprehensive user documentation is available to assist you in configuring and programming the S7-300. you can select and use this documentation as required. table h-1 gives you an overview of the documentation for step 7 . table h-1 manuals for configuring and programming the S7-300 title contents system software for S7-300/400 program design programming manual the programming manual offers basic information on the design of the operating system and a user program of an S7-300. for novice users of an S7-300/400 it provides an overview of the programming principles on which the design of user programs is based. standard software for s7 und m7 step 7 user manual the step 7 user manual describes the principle and functions of the step 7 software for programmable logic controllers. the manual provides both novice and experienced users of step 5 with an overview of the procedures used to configure, program and start up an S7-300/400. step 7 includes an online help system for detailed answers to questions regarding the use of the software. statement list (stl) for S7-300/400 programming manual the manuals for the stl, lad and scl packages each comprise the user manual and the language description. for programming an S7-300/400 you need only one of the languages, but, if required you can switch between the language to be used in a ladder logic (lad) for S7-300 and s7-400 programming manual requ i re d , you can sw i tc h b etween t h e l anguage to b e use d i n a project. if it is the first time that you use one of the languages, the manuals will help you in getting familiar with the programming principles. when working with the software, you can use the on-line help, structured control language (scl) 1 for S7-300 and s7-400 programming manual when working with the software , you can use the on line hel , which provides you with detailed information on editors and compilers. h
simatic s7 reference literature h-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 table h-1 manuals for configuring and programming the S7-300, continued title contents graph 1 for S7-300 and s7-400 sequential function charts manual with the graph, higraph, cfc languages, you can implement sequential function charts, state diagrams or graphic interconnections of blocks. each of the manuals comprises a user manual and a language descri p tion if it is the first time that you higraph1 for S7-300 and s7-400 programming state diagrams manual manua l an d a l anguage d escr i pt i on. if i t i s t h e fi rst t i me t h at you use one of these languages, the manual will help you in getting familiar with the programming principles. when working with the software, you can also use the on-line help (not for higraph), hi h id ith d t il d i f ti dit d continuous function charts (cfc) 1 for s7 and m7 programming continuous function charts manual which provides you with detailed information on editors and compilers. system software for S7-300 and s7-400 system and standard functions reference manual the s7-cpu's offer systems and standard functions which are integrated in the operating system. you can use these functions when writing programs in one of the languages, that is stl, lad and scl. the manual provides an overview of the functions available with s7 and, for reference purposes, detailed interface descriptions which you require in your user program. 1 optional system software packages for S7-300/400 communication manual the communication with simatic manual gives you an introduction to and overview of the communication possible in simatic.
simatic s7 reference literature h-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 manuals for profibus-dp for the configuration and startup of a profibus-dp network, you will need the descriptions of the other nodes and network components integrated in the network. to help you with this, you can order the manuals listed in table h-2. table h-2 manuals for profibus-dp manual et 200 distributed i/o system simatic net - profibus networks et 200m distributed i/o station sinec l2-dp interface of the s5-95u programmable controller et 200b distributed i/o station et 200c distributed i/o station et 200u distributed i/o station et 200 handheld unit technical overviews s7/m7 programmable controllers distributed i/o with profibus-dp and as-i
simatic s7 reference literature h-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 technical literature table h-3 lists a selection of technical literature which you can obtain directly from siemens or from book retailers. table h-3 list of books you can order title siemens order number book retailers' order number speicherprogrammierbare steuerungen, grundbegriffe siemens-ag, berlin and munich, 1989 a19100-l531-f913 isbn 3-8009-8031-2 sps speicherprogrammierbare steuerungen vom relaisersatz bis zum cim-verbund eberhardt e. gr?tsch oldenbourg verlag; munich, vienna 1989 a19100-l531-g231 isbn 3-486-21114-5 speicherprogrammierbare steuerungen sps; band 1: verknpfungs- und ablaufsteuerungen; von der steuerungsaufgabe zum steuerungsprogramm gnter wellenreuther, dieter zastrow braunschweig (3rd edition) 1988 isbn 3-528-24464-x steuern und regeln mit sps andratschke, wolfgang franzis-verlag isbn 3-7723-5623-0 dezentralisieren mit profibus dp aufbau, projektierung und einsatz des profibus dp mit simatic s7 josef weigmann, gerhard kilian publicis mcd verlag, 1998 a19100-l531-b714 isbn 3-89578-074-x
i-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 safety of electronic control equipment introduction the information provided here is of a predominantly fundamental nature and applies regardless of the type of electronic control system and its manufacturer. reliability maximum reliability of the simatic systems and components is achieved by implementing the following extensive and cost-effective measures during the development and manufacture: this includes the following: s use of high-quality components; s worst-case design of all circuits; s systematic and computer-controlled testing of all components supplied by subcontractors; s burn-in of all lsi circuits (e.g. processors, memories, etc.); s measures to prevent static charge building up when handling mos ics; s visual checks at different stages of manufacture; s continuous heat-run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of several days; s careful computer-controlled final testing; s statistical evaluation of all faulty systems and components to enable the immediate initiation of suitable corrective measures; s monitoring of the most important control components using on-line tests (watchdog for the cpu, etc.). these measures are basic measures. they prevent or rectify a large proportion of possible faults. i
safety of electronic control equipment i-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 risks in all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury to persons, special measures must be taken to enhance the safety of the installation and therefore also of the situation. for this type of application, relevant, plant-specific regulations exist that must be observed on installing the control systems (e.g. vde 0116 for burner control systems). for electronic control equipment with a safety function, the measures that have to be taken to prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the installation. above a certain potential danger, the basic measures listed above are no longer sufficient. in such cases, additional measures (e.g. redundant configurations, tests, etc.) must be implemented for the control equipment and certified (din vde 0801). the s5-95f fail-safe programmable controller has been prototype tested by the german technical inspectorate, bia and gem iii and several certificates have been granted. it is, therefore, just as able as the s5-115f fail-safe plc that has already been tested to control and monitor safety-related areas of the installation. subdivision into safety-related and non-safety-related areas in almost every installation there are sections that perform safety-related tasks (e.g. emergency stop pushbuttons, protective guards, two-hand-operated switches). to avoid the need to examine the entire controller from the aspect of safety, the controller is usually divided into a safety-related and non-safety-related area . in the non-safety-related area, no special demands are placed on the safety of the control equipment because any failure in the electronics will have no effect on the safety of the installation. in the safety-related area, however, the only control systems and switchgear that are permitted to be used are those that comply with the relevant regulations. the following divisions are common in practical situations: 1. for control equipment with few safety-related functions (e.g. machine controls) the conventional plc is responsible for machine control and the safety-related functions are implemented with the fail-safe s5-95f mini plc. 2. for control equipment with a medium degree of safety-related functionality (e.g. chemical installations, cable cars) the non-safety-related area is also implemented here with a conventional plc and the safety-related area is implemented with a tested fail-safe plc (s5-115f or several s5-95fs). the entire installation is implemented with a fail-safe control system. 3. for control equipment with mainly safety-related functions (e.g. burner control systems) the entire control system is implemented with fail-safe technology.
safety of electronic control equipment i-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 important information even when electronic control equipment has been configured for maximum design safety, for example using multi-channel setups, it is still of the utmost importance that the instructions given in the operating manual are followed exactly. incorrect handling can render measures intended to prevent dangerous faults ineffective, or generate additional sources of danger.
safety of electronic control equipment i-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
j-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 siemens worldwide in this appendix in this appendix you will find a list of the following: s siemens offices in the federal republic of germany s all european and non-european offices and representatives of siemens ag. j
siemens worldwide j-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 simatic partners in the federal republic of germany n 52066 aachen aut p 13, mr georgens kurbrunnenstr. 22 n 86159 augsburg aut s11, mr hirth wernervonsiemens str. 6 % (02 41) 4 512 52 fax (02 41) 4 513 98 % (08 21) 25 954 50 fax (08 21) 25 954 08 zn 04105 leipzig aut p 2, ms kiesewetter springerstr. 15 zn 18069 rostock aut, ms langhammer industriestr. 15 % (03 41) 2 1030 07 fax (03 41) 2 1030 63 % (03 81) 7821 71 fax (03 81) 7821 75 n branch n 33605 bielefeld aut p 12, ms schlpmann schweriner str. 1 n 95448 bayreuth aut p/s 11, ms h?sl weiherstr. 25 n 10587 berlin aut p 1, mr liebner salzufer 68 % (09 21) 2 813 41 fax (09 21) 2 814 44 % (0 30) 39 9323 97 fax (0 30) 39 9323 02 % (05 21) 2 915 21 fax (05 21) 2 915 90 zn 01189 dresden aut 1, mr lehmann karlsruher str. 111 % (03 51) 40 222 77 fax (03 51) 40 222 74 zn 40219 dsseldorf aut p 15, mr becker lahnweg 10 % (02 11) 3 9916 64 fax (02 11) 3 9918 48 zn 76185 karlsruhe aut 14 p, mr boltz bannwaldallee 48 % (07 21) 9 9224 13 fax (07 21) 9 9225 85 zn 34117 kassel aut p 13, mr uhlig brgermeisterbrunnerstr.15 % (05 61) 78 863 32 fax (05 61) 78 864 48 zn 87439 kempten aut p, mr fink lindauer str. 112 % (08 31) 58 182 25 fax (08 31) 58 182 40 n 38126 braunschweig aut p 11, mr pelka ackerstr. 20 % (05 31) 27 123 05 fax (05 31) 27 124 16 n 28195 bremen aut p 12, ms ulbrich contrescarpe 72 n 09114 chemnitz aut p 11, ms aurich bornaer str. 205 % (04 21) 3 6424 27 fax (04 21) 3 6428 42 % (03 71) 4 7535 10 fax (03 71) 4 7535 25 zn 99097 erfurt aut p 22, mr skudelny haarbergstr. 47 % (03 61) 4 2523 51 fax (03 61) 4 2523 50 zn 45128 essen aut p 14, mr klein kruppstr. 16 % (02 01) 8 1624 28 fax (02 01) 8 1623 31 zn 60329 frankfurt aut p 25, mr w. mller r?delheimer landstr. 13 % (0 69) 7 9734 18 fax (0 69) 7 9734 42 zn 79104 freiburg aut p, mr thoma habsburgerstr. 132 % (07 61) 27 122 38 fax (07 61) 27 124 46 zn 20099 hamburg aut 1, mr rohde lindenplatz 2 % (0 40) 28 8930 03 fax (0 40) 28 8932 09 zn 24109 kiel aut 1, ms drews wittland 24 % (04 31) 58 603 26 fax (04 31) 58 602 48 zn 56068 koblenz aut p 11, mr ricke frankenstr. 21 % (02 61) 1 322 44 fax (02 61) 1 322 55 zn 50823 k?ln aut p 14, mr prescher franzgeuer str. 10 % (02 21) 5 7627 62 fax (02 21) 5 7627 95 zn 78416 konstanz aut p, ms wiest fritzarnoldstr. 16 % (075 31) 9882 02 fax (075 31) 9881 40 zn 39106 magdeburg aut vg 33, mr ganschinietz sieverstorstr. 3233 % (03 91) 5 8817 21 fax (03 91) 5 8817 22 zn 68165 mannheim aut 16 p, mr sulzbacher dynamostr. 4 % (06 21) 4 5628 43 fax (06 21) 4 5625 45 zn 81679 mnchen aut p 14, mr sch?fer richardstraussstr. 76 % (0 89) 92 2130 64 fax (0 89) 92 2143 99 zn 48153 mnster aut s 13, mr schlieckmann siemensstr. 55 % (02 51) 76 054 25 fax (02 51) 76 053 36 zn 90439 nrnberg aut p 11, mr glas vondertannstr. 30 % (09 11) 6 5435 87 fax (09 11) 6 5473 84 zn 49090 osnabrck aut s 13, mr p?hler eversburger str. 32 % (05 41) 12 132 73 fax (05 41) 12 133 50 zn 93053 regensburg aut p/s 12, mr rewitzer hornstr. 10 % (09 41) 40 071 97 fax (09 41) 40 072 36 zn 66111 saarbrcken aut, mr mller martinlutherstr. 25 % (06 81) 3 8622 89 fax (06 81) 3 8621 11 zn 57072 siegen aut p 11, mr patz sandstr. 4248 % (02 71) 23 022 40 fax (02 71) 23 022 38 zn 70499 stuttgart aut p 11, mr mller weissacherstr. 11 % (07 11) 1 3726 44 fax (07 11) 1 3729 46 zn 54292 trier aut vg 14 p, mr baldauf l?bstr. 15 % (06 51) 20 0923 fax (06 51) 20 0924 zn 89079 ulm aut zr, mr birk nikolausottostr. 4 % (07 31) 94 503 28 fax (07 31) 94 503 34 zn 97084 wrzburg aut pis 13, mr vogt andreasgrieser str. 30 % (09 31) 61 014 59 fax (09 31) 61 015 42 zn 42103 wuppertal siehe zn 45128 essen aut p 14, mr klein kruppstr. 16 % (02 01) 8 1624 28 fax (02 01) 8 1623 31 zn 30519 laatzen (hannover) aut p 10, ms hoffmann hildesheimer str. 7 % (05 11) 8 7723 19 fax (05 11) 8 7727 39 zn 74076 heilbronn aut p/s, mr gaul neckarsulmer str. 59 % (0 71 31) 1 832 03 fax (0 71 31) 1 833 20
siemens worldwide j-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 simatic partners in europe (excluding the federal republic of germany) 48011 bilbao siemens s.a., aut 1, mr tapia maximo aguirre, 18 % 00 34 (4) 4 27 64 33 fax 00 34 (4) 4 27 82 39 1060 bruessel siemens s.a., vp4, mr gmuer chaussee de chaleroi 116 % 00 32 (2) 5 36 25 33 fax 00 32 (2) 5 36 23 87 belgium 1113 sofia siemens ag, ms kirova blvd. dragan zankov nr. 36 % 0 03 59 (2) 70 85 21 fax 0 03 59 (2) 68 50 51 bulgaria 2750 ballerup siemens a/s, ip, mr hansen borupvang 3 % 00 45 (44) 77 42 90 fax 00 45 (44 )77 40 16 denmark 15110 amaroussio/athen siemens a.e., hb 3 aut, mr antoniou; paradissou & artemidos, p.o.b. 6 10 11 % 00 30 (1) 68 645 15 fax 00 30 (1) 68 645 56 greece 40127 bologna siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr tosatti via casciarolo, 8 % 00 39 (51) 6 38 45 09 fax 00 39 (51) 24 32 13 italy 6040 innsbruck/neurum siemens ag, aut, mr mayr siemensstra?e 24, postf. 9 04 % 00 43 (5 12) 23 12 60 fax 00 43 (5 12) 23 15 30 02601 espoo siemens osakeyhtioe, oem/aut 1, mr saarelainen majurinkatu, p.o.b. 60 % 0 03 58 (0) 51 05 36 70 fax 0 03 58 (0) 51 05 36 56 finland france 33694 merignac/bordeaux siemens s.a., aut 1, leitstelle, parc cadera sud 36, avenue ariane, bp 351 % 00 33/ 56 13 32 66 fax 00 33/ 56 55 99 59 59812 lesquin, cedex/lille siemens s.a., aut 1, leitstelle 78, rue de gustave delroy bp 239 % 00 33/ 20 95 71 91 fax 00 33/ 20 95 71 86 69641 caluireetcuire/lyon siemens s.a., aut 1, leitstelle 911, chemin des petites brosses, bp 39 % 00 33/ 78 98 60 08 fax 00 33/ 78 98 60 18 44300 nantes siemens s.a., aut 1, leitstelle, zac du perray 9, rue du petit chatelier % 00 33/ 40 18 68 30 fax 00 33/ 40 93 04 83 93527 saint denis, cedex 2/paris siemens s.a., aut 1, mr granger 39/47, bd ornano % 00 33 (1) 49 22 33 18 fax 00 33 (1) 49 22 32 05 67016 strasbourg, cedex siemens s.a., aut 1, leistelle 2, rue du rhinnapoleon bp 48 % 00 33/ 88 45 98 22 fax 00 33/ 88 60 08 40 31106 toulouse siemens s.a., aut 1, mr huguet zac de basso cambo avenue du mirail, bp 1304 % 00 33/ 62 11 20 15 fax 00 33/ 61 43 02 20 54110 thessaloniki siemens a.e., vb 3 aut, mr passalidis georgikis scholis 89, p.o.b. 10290 % 00 30 (31) 47 92 12 fax 00 30 (31) 47 92 65 manchester m20 2ur siemens plc, control systems, mr hardern sir william siemens house, princess road % 00 44 (61) 4 46 52 33 fax 00 44 (61) 4 46 52 32 great britain dublin 11 siemens ltd., power & automa tion division, mr mulligan 811 slaney road dublin industrial estate % 0 03 53 (1) 8 30 28 55 fax 0 03 53 (1) 8 30 31 51 ireland 121 reykjavik smith & norland h/f, mr kjartansson, noatuni 4, p.o.b. 519 % 0 03 54 (1) 62 83 00 fax 0 03 54 (1) 62 83 40 25128 brescia siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr gaspari, via della volta, 92 % 00 39 (30) 3 53 05 26 fax 00 39 (30) 34 66 20 20124 milano siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr berti, via lazzaroni, 3 % 00 39 (2) 66 76 28 36 fax 00 39 (2) 66 76 28 20 35129 padova siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr millevoi, viale dell'industria, 19 % 00 39 (49) 8 29 13 11 fax 00 39 (49) 8 07 00 09 00142 roma siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr vessio, via laurentina, 455 % 00 39 (6) 5 00 951 fax 00 39 (6) 5 00 95 20 10127 torino siemens s.p.a., aut r10a, mr montoli, via pio vii, 127 % 00 39 (11) 6 17 31 fax 00 39 (11) 61 61 35 41000 zagreb siemens d.o.o., mr culjak trg drazena petrovica 3 ("cibona") % 0 03 85 (41) 33 88 95 fax 0 03 85 (41) 32 66 95 croatia 1017 luxemburghamm siemens s.a., aut, mr nockels 20, rue des peupliers b.p. 1701 % 0 03 52/ 4 38 434 21 fax 0 03 52/ 4 38 434 15 luxembourg 2595 al den haag siemens nederland n.v., ips/aps, mr penris, prinses beatrixlaan 26 % 00 31 (70) 3 33 32 74 fax 00 31 (70) 3 33 34 96 netherlands 5033 fyllingsdalen siemens a/s bergen, mr troan, bratsbergveien 5 postboks 36 60 % 00 47 (55) 17 67 41 fax 00 47 (55) 16 44 70 norway 6901 bregenz siemens ag, aut, mr madlener josefhuterstra?e 6, postfach 347 % 00 43 (55 74) 41 92 72 fax 00 43 (55 74) 41 92 88 austria 8054 graz siemens ag, aut, mr jammernegg strassganger stra?e 315 postfach 39 % 00 43 (3 16) 2 80 42 80 fax 00 43 (3 16) 2 80 42 85 9020 klagenfurt siemens ag, aut, mr weber werner von siemens park 1 % 00 43 (4 63) 3 88 32 43 fax 00 43 (4 63) 3 88 34 49 4020 linz siemens ag, aut, mr schmidt wolfgangpaulistra?e 2 postfach 563 % 00 43 (7 32) 3 33 02 95 fax 00 43 (7 32) 3 33 04 93 5020 salzburg siemens ag, aut, mr mariacher jun. innsbrucker bundesstra?e 35 postfach 3 % 00 43 (6 62) 4 48 83 35 fax 00 43 (6 62) 4 48 83 09 1211 wien siemens ag, aut 1, mr strasser, siemensstra?e 8892, postfach 83 % 00 43 (1) 25 01 37 88 fax 00 43 (1) 25 01 39 40 40931 katowice siemens sp. z.o.o., niederlassung katowice, mr krzak ul. kosciuszki 30 % 00 48 (3) 157 32 66 fax 00 48 (3) 157 30 75 poland 60815 poznan siemens sp. z.o.o., niederlassung poznan, mr weiss ul. gajowa 6 % 00 48 (61) 47 08 86 fax 00 48 (61) 47 08 89 03821 warszawa siemens sp. z.o.o., mr cieslak ul. zupnicza 11, % 00 48 (2) 6 70 91 47 fax 00 48 (2) 6 70 91 49 53332 wroclaw siemens sp. z.o.o., niederlassung wroclaw, mr wojniak ul. powstancw slaskich 95 % 00 48 (71) 60 59 97 fax 00 48 (71) 60 55 88 2700 amadora siemens s.a., dep. energia e industria, mr eng. c. pelicano estrada nacional 117 ao km 2,6 alfragide, apartado 60300 % 0 03 51 (1) 4 17 85 03 fax 0 03 51 (1) 4 17 80 71 portugal 4450 matosinhosporto siemens s.a., dep. energia e industria, mr eng. a. amaral, estrada nacional 107, no. 3570 freixieiro, apartado 5145 % 0 03 51 (2) 9 99 21 11 fax 0 03 51 (2) 9 99 20 01 76640 bucuresti siemens, birou de consultatii tehnice, mr fritsch str. zarii no. 12, sector 5 % 00 40 (1) 2 23 47 95 fax 00 40 (1) 2 23 45 69 rumania 40020 g?teborg siemens ab, asp, mr ohlsson ?stergardsgatan 24 box 1 41 53 % 00 46 (31) 7 76 86 53 fax 00 46 (31) 7 76 86 76 sweden 55111 j?nk?ping siemens ab, asp, mr jonsson klubbhusgatan 15, box 10 07 % 00 46 (36) 15 29 00 fax 00 46 (36) 16 51 91 20123 malm? siemens ab, asp, mr j?mtgren grimsbygatan 24, box 326 % 00 46 (40) 17 46 14 fax 00 46 (40) 17 46 17 19487 upplands v?sby/stockholm siemens ab, aspa1, mr persson johanneslandsv?gen 1214 % 00 46 (8) 7 28 14 64 fax 00 46 (8) 7 28 18 00 85122 sundsvall siemens ab, asp, mr sj?berg lagergatan 14, box 766 % 00 46 (60) 18 56 00 fax 00 46 (60) 61 93 44 1020 renens/lausanne siemensalbis sa, systemes d'automation, vhrl, ms thevenaz 5, av. des baumettes case postale 1 53 % 00 41 (21) 6 31 83 09 fax 00 41 (21) 6 31 84 48 switzerland 8047 zrich siemensalbis ag, vhr 3, mr engel, freilagerstra?e 2840 % 00 41 (1) 4 95 58 82 fax 00 41 (1) 4 95 31 85 81261 bratislava siemens ag, mr sykorcin, tovarenska 11 % 00 42 (7) 31 21 74 fax 00 42 (7) 31 63 32 slovakian republic 61000 ljubljana siemens slovenija, mr lavric dunajska c47 % 0 03 86 (61) 1 32 60 68 fax 0 03 86 (61) 1 32 42 81 slovenia 08940 cornella de llobregat/ barcelona siemens s.a., aut 1, mr ortiz joan fernandez vallhonrat, 1 % 00 34 (3) 4 74 22 12 fax 00 34 (3) 4 74 42 34 spain 33206 gijon siemens s.a., aut 1, mr huchet corrida, 1 % 00 34 (85) 35 08 00 fax 00 34 (85) 34 93 10 15005 la coruna siemens s.a., aut 1, mr pereira linares rivas, 1214 % 00 34 (81) 12 07 51 fax 00 34 (81) 12 03 60 28760 tres cantos (madrid ) siemens s.a., aut 1, mr olaguibel, ronda de europa, 5 % 00 34 (1) 8 03 12 00 fax 00 34 (1) 8 03 22 71 30008 murcia siemens s.a., aut 1, mr martinez marques de los velez, 13 % 00 34 (68) 23 36 62 fax 00 34 (68) 23 52 36 41092 sevilla siemens s.a., aut 1, mr de la fuente isla de la cartuja paseo de la acacias, s/n (edificio siemens) % 00 34 (5) 4 46 30 00 fax 00 34 (5) 4 46 30 46 46021 valencia siemens s.a., aut 1, mr albors avda. aragon, 30 (ed. europa) % 00 34 (6) 3 69 94 00 fax 00 34 (6) 3 62 61 19 36204 vigo siemens s.a., aut 1, mr garrido pizarro, 29 % 00 34 (86) 41 60 33 fax 00 34 (86) 41 84 64 50012 zaragoza siemens s.a., aut 1, mr aliaga avda. alcalde gomez laguna, 9 % 00 34 (76) 35 61 50 fax 00 34 (76) 56 68 86 60200 brno siemens ag, kancelar brno, mr tucek, vinarsk 6 % 00 42 (5) 43 21 17 49 fax 00 42 (5) 43 21 19 86 czech republic 14000 praha 4 siemens ag, zastoupeni v cr, mr skop, na strzi 40 % 00 42 (2) 61 21 50 33 6 fax 00 42 (2) 61 21 51 46 80040 findikliistanbul simko tic. ve san. a. s., aut 1, ms yargic meclisi mebusan cad. no 125 % 00 90 (212) 2 51 17 06 fax 00 90 (212) 2 52 39 16 turkey 252054 kiew 54 siemensvertretung, aut, mr liebschner, ul. worowskowo 27 % 0 07 (044) 2 16 02 22 fax 0 07 (044) 2 16 94 92 ukraine 1036 budapest siemens gmbh, aut 1, mr turi lajos utca 103 % 00 36 (1) 2 69 74 55 fax 00 36 (1) 2 69 74 54 hungary iceland 113043 moskau siemens ag, mr engelhard/ mr michailow, ul. dubininskaja 98 % 0 07 (0 95) 2 36 75 00 fax 0 07 (0 95) 2 36 62 00 80040 findlikiistanbul simko a.s., aut asi 1, ms yargic meclisi mebusan cad. 125 % 00 90 (1) 25 10 90 01 706 fax 00 90 (1) 25 10 90 07 09 russia 0518 oslo 5 siemens a/s, aut produkter, mr eggen, ostre aker vei 90 postboks 10, veitvet % 00 47 (22) 63 34 09 fax 00 47 (22) 63 33 90 7004 trondheim siemens a/s trondheim, mr thorsen, spelaugen 22 % 00 47 (73) 95 96 69 fax 00 47 (73) 95 95 04 06680 ankarakavaklidere simkoankara, mr ensert, atatrk bulvari no. 169/6 % 00 90 (312) 4 18 22 05
siemens worldwide j-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 simatic partners outside of europe santiago de chile ingelsac,div. energia, mr browne avda. holanda 64, cas. 242v % +56 (2) 2 31 00 00 fax +56 (2) 2 32 66 88 chile 5000 cordoba, prov. de cordoba siemens s.a., mr s. garcia, campillo 70 % +54 (51) 739940/994 fax +54 (51) 7297 14 16035 hydra/alger siemens, bureau d'alger, division energie, mr bennour, 44, rue abri areski , b.p. 112 % +213 (2) 60 40 88 fax +213 (2) 60 65 98 afrika ?gypten algeria tunisia abidjan 15/r. c. i. siemens ag, semen, mr. hellal, 16 b.p. 1062 % +2 25 (37) 46 57 fax +2 25 (27) 10 21 ivory coast tn2062 romanale bardo faze sarl electrotechnique, mr fantar, immeuble cham % +2 16 (1) 51 90 91 fax +2 16 (1) 50 19 32 electro technologies corp. (pvt.) ltd./ siemens zimbabwe, mr ron claassens, savoy house cnr. inez terrace/j. moyo ave p.o. box 46 80 % +263 (4) 79 18 66 fax +263 (4) 75 44 06 zimbabwe ecuador quito siemens s.a., dept. dea, mr j. guerra calle manuel zambrano y panamericana norte km 2 1/2 casilla de correos 17013580 % +5 93 (2) 47 40 60 fax +5 93 (2) 40 77 38 san salvador siemens s.a., e/a, mr m. dubon 43, calle siemens parque industrial sta. elena apartado 1525 % +5 03 78 33 33 fax +5 03 78 33 34 el salvador ciudad de guatemala siemens s.a., ea/aut, mr godoy 2a calle 676 zona 10, apartado 1959 % +5 02 (2) 32 44 44 fax +5 02 (2) 34 36 70 guatemala peru lima 13 esim s.a., dept. aut, mr pazsoldan avda, n. arriola 385 4to piso % +51 (14) 71 46 61 fax +51 (14) 71 09 93 casablanca 05 setel s.a., aut, mr el bachiri, immeuble siemens, km 1, route de rabat, ain sebaa % +212 (2) 35 10 25 fax +212 (2) 34 01 51 morocco windhoek 9000 siemens (pty) ltd., mr jrgen hoff 9 albert wessels street industries north, p.o.b. 23125 % +2 64 (61) 6 13 58/59 fax +2 64 (61) 6 13 77 namibia rsa2001 braamfontein siemens ltd., aut, mr e. hillermann siemens house sh 401 corner wolmarans & biccard streets, p.o. box 4583 2000 johannesburg % +27 (11) 4 07 41 11 % +27 (11) 4 07 48 15 fax +27 (11) 4 07 46 82 south africa america argentina 05110900 sao paulo, sp, pinituba maxitec s.a., autpa, mr f. rocco, avenida mutinga, 3650 % +55 (11) 8 36 29 99 fax +55 (11) 8 36 29 50 brazil san jose 1000 siemens s.a. san jose, division energia y automatizacion, vat, mr ferraro, la uruca, apartado 100 22 % +5 06 87 50 50 fax +5 06 21 50 50 costa rica mississauga, on l5n 7ag siemens electric ltd., dept. sl 20, mr fred leon, 2185 derry road west % +1 (905) 7 92 81 95 82 fax +1 (905) 58 19 58 12 canada baranquilla siemens s.a., ea, mr c. perez, carrera 58 no. 70940 % +57 (958) 56 11 48 fax +57 (958) 56 11 48 columbia 02300 mexico, d.f. siemens s.a. de c.v., eiaut, mr gregorio sanchez delegacion azcapotzalco poniente 116, no. 590 colonia industrial vallejo apartado postal 15064, 02600 mexico % +52 (5) 3 28 20 00 fax +52 (5) 3 28 21 92 fax +52 (5) 3 28 21 93 mexico usa venezuela 1071 caracas siemens s.a., autasi, mr jesus cavada avda. don diego cisneros urbanizacion los ruices, ap. 3616, caracas 1010 a % +58 (2) 2 39 07 33 fax +58 (2) 2 03 82 00 510064 guangzhou siemens ltd. china, guangzhou office, mr peter chen, room 11341157 garden hotel garden tower, 368 huanshi dong lu % +86 (20) 3 85 46 88 fax +86 (20) 3 34 74 54 asia china hongkong hong kong siemens ltd. hang kong a. r. o., automation system , division , mr keiren lake, 7th floor, regency centre, 39 wong chuk hang road % +85 (2) 28 70 76 11 fax +85 (2) 25 18 04 11 india bangalore 560 001 siemens ltd., ban/autmap, mr b. sunderram jyoti mahal, 3rd floor 49, st. marks road, p.o.b. 5212 % +91 (80) 2 21 21 01 fax +91 (80) 2 21 24 18 zamalik/egycairo eletech, aut, mr w. y. graiss 6 zarkaria rizk street, p.o.b. 90 % +20 (2) 3 42 03 71 fax +20 (2) 3 42 03 76 tn2035 charguia ii tunis sitelec s.a. mr mouelhi 16, rue de l'usine zone industrielle (aroport), bp 115, 1050 tunis cedex % +2 16 (1) 70 00 99 fax +2 16 (1) 71 70 10 point claire, que h9r4r6 siemens electric ltd., mr d. goulet 7300 trans canada highway % +1 (514) 4 26 60 99 fax +1 (514) 4 26 61 44 burnaby, b. c. v5j 5j1 siemens electic ltd., mr a. mazurek marine way business park 8875 northbrook court % +1 (604) 4 35 08 80 fax +1 (604) 4 35 10 23 alpharetta, ga 30202 sia inc., regional sales manager sautheast, mr mich gunyon, technology drive % +1 (4 04) 7 40 36 60 fax +1 (4 04) 7 40 36 96 andover, ma 01810 sia inc., north east region, mr mark fondl, one tech drive, suite 310 % +1 (5 08) 6 85 60 77 fax +1 (5 08) 6 86 88 72 mukilteo, wa 98275 sia inc., midwwest region, mr earl haas, 8412 54th avenue west % +1 (7 14) 9 79 66 00 fax +1 (7 14) 5 57 90 61 plymouth, mn 55442 sia inc., midwest region, mr greg jaster, 13235 45th avenue no. % +1 (7 08) 6 40 15 95 fax +1 (7 08) 6 40 80 26 tripoli/libya s.p.l.a.j. siemens ag, branch libya, mr wahab, zatelimad building tower no. 5, floor no. 9 p.o.b. 91 531 % +218 (21) 4 15 34 fax +218 (21) 4 79 40 libya la paz sociedad comercial e industrial hansa ltda., e & a, mr beckmann calle mercado esq. yanacocha c. p. 10 800 % +591 (2) 35 44 45 fax +591 (2) 37 03 97 bolivia 100015 beijing siemens ltd. china, beijing office, mr wolfgang s?llner 7, wangjing zhonghuan nan lu chaoyang district p.o. box 8543 % +86 (10) 4 36 18 88 fax +86 (10) 4 36 32 13 200090 shanghai siemens ltd. china, shanghai office, mr william cui, 450, lin quing lu % +86 (21) 5 39 54 10 fax +86 (21) 5 39 54 21 110001 shenyang siemens ltd. china, shenyang office, mr ren qi, sakei torch building 23rd fl. 262a shifu da lu shen he district % +86 (24) 2 79 02 87 fax +86 (24) 2 79 02 86 bombay 400 018 siemens ltd., aut/map, mr s. mistry head office b building 130, ganpat jahav marg. worli % +91 (22) 4 93 13 50/60 fax +91 (22) 4 95 08 22 8000 bahia blanca, prov. de buenos aires siemens s.a., mr s.duran, rudriguez 159 % +54 (91) 5561 41 fax +54 (91) 5561 71 2000 rosario, prov. de santa fe siemens s.a., mr r. stiza, ricchieri 750 % +54 (1) 41 3703 21/0 fax +54 (1) 41 3707 87 5539 las heras, prov. de mendoza siemens s.a., mr s. suarez, acceso norte 379 % +54 (61) 3000 22/0 37 fax +54 (61) 3000 22/0 37 (1650) san martin, prov. de buenos aires siemens s.a., peiaut, mr rudriguez juis/mr roland herron, gral, roca 1865, ruta 8, km 18 c.c. % +54 (1) 7 38 71 92/7 15 % +54 (1) 7 38 71 85 fax 254 (1) 7 38 71 71 bogota 6 siemens s.a., division energia, mr m. jaramillo carrera 65, no. 1183 apartado 80150 % +57 (1) 2 94 22 66 fax +57 (1) 2 94 24 98 cali siemens s.a., barranquilla, mr guido hernandez carrera 40, no. 1305 % +57 (92) 664 44 00 fax +57 (92)665 30 56 cali siemens s.a. cali mr c. a. naranjo carrera 48 a, 15 sur 92 % +57 (94) 2 6630 66 fax +57 (94) 2 6825 57 houston, tx 77040 sia inc., southwest region, mr wade bradford 13100 northwest freeway, suite 210 % +1 (713) 6 90 03 33 fax +1 (713) 4 60 44 50 mason, oh 450409011 sia inc., central region, mr luther crouthamel, 4770 duke drive suite 381 % +1 (5 13) 3 98 96 91 fax +1 (5 13) 3 98 98 39 calcutta 700 071 siemens ltd., cal/autmap, mr d. k. ganguli 6, little russel street, p.o.b. 715 % +91 (33) 2 47 83 74/80 fax +91 (33) 2 47 47 83
siemens worldwide j-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 simatic partners outside of europe adelaide siemens ltd. adelaide office, cs/i.a., mr j. weiss, 315 glen osmond road glenunga, s.a. 5064 % +61 (8) 3 79 66 66 fax +61 (8) 3 79 08 99 thailand bangkok 10110 berli jucker co. ltd., mr narong berli jucker house 99, soi rubia, sukhumvit 42 road p.o. box 173 bmc, bangkok 1000 % +66 (2) 3 67 11 11 fax +66 (2) 3 67 10 00 australia vietnam hanoi siemens ag, representation office mr nguyen huang giang 18, phan boi chau street % +84 (4) 25 60 61 fax +84 (4) 26 62 27 melbourne siemens ltd., cs/i.a., mr n. gilholm, 544 church street richmond, victoria 3121 % +61 (3) 4 20 75 20 fax +61 (3) 4 20 75 00 perth siemens ltd., cs/i.a., mr a. lostrom 153, burswood road victoria park, w.a. 6100 % +61 (9) 3 62 01 42 fax +61 (9) 3 62 01 47 sydney, n.s.w. 2064 siemens ltd. sidney, industrial automation, mr stephen coop, 383 pacific highway, artamon % +61 (2) 4 36 78 04 fax +61 (2) 4 36 86 24 new zealand greenlane, auckland 5 siemens ltd. auckland office, cs/i.a., mr a. richmond 300 great south road p.o.b 17122 % +64 (9) 5 20 30 33 fax +64 (9) 5 20 15 56 indonesia jakarta 12870 dian graha elektrika, jakarta, power eng. & autom. div., mr m. zafrullah jl. gatot subroto kov. 7475, mustika centre building floor 2a., p.o. box 4267 % +62 (21) 8 30 65 74 fax +62 (21) 8 30 74 02 japan tokyo 14100 siemens k.k., att, mr nakamichi siemens fujikara building, 8f 1120, nishigotanda 2chome shinagawaku % +81 (3) 34 90 44 37 fax +81 (3) 34 95 97 92 karachi 74400 siemens pakistan eng. co. ltd., power division, mr iiyas ilaco house abdullah haroon road p.o. box 7158 % +92 (21) 51 60 61 fax +92 (21) 5 68 46 79 philippines metro manila siemens inc., mr b. bonifacio 2nd & 4th fl., sterling centre bldg. esteban cor. de la rosa legaspi village % +63 (2) 8 18 48 18 fax +63 (2) 8 18 48 22 saudi arabia jeddah 21412 arabia electric ltd. service center, mr kobeissi, p.o.b. 4621 % +9 66 (2) 6 65 84 20 fax +9 66 (2) 6 65 84 90 singapore singapore 1334 siemens (pte) ltd. singapore, aut, mr ulf bexell, 2 kallang sector % +65 8 41 35 28 fax +65 8 41 35 29 south korea seoul siemens ltd., e+a, mr kang w. s. asia tower building, 9th floor 726 yeoksamdong, kangnamku, c.p.o. box 3001 % +82 (2) 5 27 77 62 fax +82 (2) 5 27 77 19 taiwan taipei 106 siemens ltd., aut 1, mr gulden 6th fl., cathy life insurance bldg. 296, jen ai road, sec. 4 % +8 86 (2) 3 25 48 88 fax +8 86 (2) 7 05 49 75 iran 15914 teheran siemens s.s.k., mr dinpayuh khiabane ayatollah taleghani 32 siemenshouse, p.o.b. 158754773, 15 teheran % +98 (21) 61 41 fax +98 (21) 6 40 23 89 pakistan new delhi 110 002 siemens ltd., del/autmap, mr r. narayanan 4a, ring road, i.p. estate, p.o.b. 7036 % +91 (11) 3 31 81 44 fax +91 (11) 3 31 41 78
siemens worldwide j-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
k-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 list of abbreviations abbrevia- tions description cp communication processor cpu central processing unit db data block fb function block fc function fm function module fo fiberoptic cable gd global data communication im interface module ip intelligent i/o lad ladder logic (programming language representation in step 7) m chassis ground mpi multipoint interface ob organization block op operator panel pg programming device pii processimage input table piq processimage output table ps power supply sfb system function block sfc system function sm signal module stl statement list (programming language representation in step 7) k
list of abbreviations k-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
glossary-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 glossary accumulator the accumulators are registers in the 3 cpu and are used as intermediate memory for loading, transfer, comparison, calculation and conversion operations. address an address is the identifier for a specific operand or operand area (e.g. input i 12.1, memory word mw 25, data block db 3). analog module analog modules convert process values (e.g. temperature) into digital values, so that they can be processed by the central processing unit, or convert digital values into analog manipulated variables. automation system an automation system is a 3 programmable controller in the context of simatic s7. backplane bus the backplane bus is a serial data bus over which the modules communicate and over which the necessary power is supplied to the modules. the connection between the modules is established by bus connectors. backup battery the backup battery ensures that the 3 user program in the 3 cpu is stored in the event of a power failure and that defined data areas and bit memories, timers and counters are retentive.
glossary glossary-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 backup memory the backup memory provides a backup of memory areas for the 3 cpu without a backup battery. a configurable number of timers, counters, memories and data bytes (retentive timers, counters, memories and data bytes) is backed up. bit memory bit memories are part of the 3 system memory of the cpu for storing interim results. they can be accessed in units of a bit, byte, word or doubleword. bus a bus is a communication medium connecting several nodes. data transmission can be serial or parallel across electrical conductors or fiber-optic cables. bus segment a bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. bus segments are interconnected using repeaters. chassis ground chassis ground is the totality of all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment on which a hazardous touch voltage cannot build up even in the event of a fault. clock memories memories that can be used for clocking purposes in the user program (1 memory byte). note note in the case of S7-300 cpus that the clock memory byte is not exceeded in the user program. code block a code block in simatic s7 is a block which contains a section of the step 7 user program (in contrast to a 3 data block which only contains data).
glossary glossary-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communication processor communication processors are modules for point-to-point and bus links. compress the programming device online function acompresso is used to align all valid blocks contiguously in the ram of the cpu at the start of the user memory. this eliminates all gaps which arose when blocks were deleted or modified. configuration assignment of modules to racks/slots and (e.g. for signal modules) addresses. consistent data data whose contents are related and which should not be separated are known as consistent data. for example, the values of analog modules must always be handled consistently, that is the value of an analog module must not be corrupted by reading it out at two different times. counter counters are part of the 3 system memory of the cpu. the content of the acounter cellso can by modified by step 7 instructions (e.g. count up/down). cp 3 communication processor cpu central processing unit of the s7 programmable controller with open and closed-loop control systems, memory, operating system and interface for programming device. cycle time the scan time is the time taken by the 3 cpu to scan the 3 user program once. data block data blocks (db) are data areas in the user program which contain user data. global data blocks can be accessed by all code blocks while instance data blocks are assigned to a specific fb call.
glossary glossary-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 data, static static data is data which can only be used within a function block. the data is saved in an instance data block belonging to the function block. the data stored in the instance data block is retained until the next function block call. data, temporary temporary data is local data of a block which is stored in the l stack during execution of a block and which is no longer available after execution. delay interrupt 3 interrupt, time-delay device master file all slave-specific characteristics are stored in a device master file (gsd file). the format of the device master file is defined in the en 50170, volume 2, profibus standard. diagnostic buffer the diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the cpu in which diagnostic events are stored in the order of their occurrence. diagnostic interrupt diagnostics-capable modules use diagnostic interrupts to report system errors which they have detected to the 3 cpu. diagnostics 3 system diagnostics dp master a 3 master which behaves in accordance with en 50170, part 3 is known as a dp master. dp slave a 3 slave which is operated in the profibus bus system using the profibus-dp protocol and which behaves in accordance with en 50170, part 3 is known as a dp slave.
glossary glossary-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 equipotential bonding electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) which gives the bodies of electrical equipment and external conducting bodies the same or approximately the same potential, in order to prevent disturbing or dangerous voltages from being generated between these bodies. error display the error display is one of the possible responses of the operating system to a 3 runtime error. the other possible responses are: 3 error response in the user program, stop status of the cpu. error handling via ob if the operating system detects a specific error (e.g. an access error with step 7 ), it calls the organization block (error ob) which is provided for this event and which specifies the subsequent behavior of the cpu. error response response to a 3 runtime error. the operating system can respond in the following ways: conversion of the programmable controller to the stop mode, call of an organization block in which the user can program a response or display of the error. external power supply power supply for the signal and function modules and the process peripherals connected to them. fb 3 function block fc 3 function flash eprom feproms are the same as electrically erasable eeproms in that they can retain data in the event of a power failure, but they can be erased much more quickly (feprom = flash erasable programmable read only memory). they are used on 3 memory cards.
glossary glossary-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 force the aforceo function overwrites a variable (e.g. memory marker, output) with a value defined by the s7 user. at the same time the variable is assigned write protection so that this value cannot be modified from any point (including from the step 7 user program). the value is retained after the programming device is disconnected. the write protection is not canceled until the aunforceo function is called and the variable is written again with the value defined by the user program. during commissioning, for example, the aforceo function allows certain outputs to be set to the aono state for any length of time even if the logic operations of the user program are not fulfilled (e.g. because inputs are not wired). function a function (fc) in accordance with iec 1131-3 is a 3 code block without 3 static data. a function allows parameters to be passed in the user program. functions are therefore suitable for programming complex functions, e.g. calculations, which are repeated frequently. function block a function block (fb) in accordance with iec 1131-3 is a 3 code block with 3 static data. an fb allows parameters to be passed in the user program. function blocks are therefore suitable for programming complex functions, e.g. closed-loop controls, mode selections, which are repeated frequently. functional grounding grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of the electrical equipment. functional grounding short-circuits interference voltage which would otherwise have an impermissible impact on the equipment. gd circle a gd circle encompasses a number of cpus which exchange data by means of global data communication and which are used as follows: s one cpu sends a gd packet to the other cpus. s one cpu sends and receives a gd packet from another cpu. a gd circle is identified by a gd circle number. gd element a gd element is generated by assigning the 3 global data to be shared and is identified by the global data identifier in the global data table.
glossary glossary-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 gd packet a gd packet can consist of one or more 3 gd objects which are transmitted together in a frame. global data global data is data which can be addressed from any 3 code block (fc, fb, ob). in detail, this refers to memories m, inputs i, outputs q, timers, counters and data blocks db. absolute or symbolic access can be made to global data. global data communication global data communication is a procedure used to transfer 3 global data between cpus (without cfbs). ground the conducting earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point. in the vicinity of grounding electrodes, the earth can have a potential different to zero. the term areference groundo is frequently used to describe these circumstances. ground (to) to ground means to connect an electrically conducting component to the grounding electrode (one or more conducting components which have a very good contact with the earth) across a grounding system. instance data block a data block, which is generated automatically, is assigned to each function block call in the step 7 user program. the values of the input, output and in/out parameters are stored in the instance data block, together with the local block data. interface, multipoint 3 mpi
glossary glossary-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 interrupt the 3 operating system of the cpu recognizes 10 different priority classes which control the execution of the user program. these runtime levels include interrupts, e.g. process interrupts. when an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the desired response (for example in an fb). interrupt, delay the time-delay interrupt belongs to one of the priority levels for program execution in the simatic s7 system. the interrupt is generated after expiry of a time delay started in the user program. a corresponding organization block is then executed. interrupt, diagnostic 3 diagnostic interrupt interrupt, process 3 process interrupt interrupt, time-of-day the time-of-day interrupt belongs to one of the runtime levels for program execution on the simatic s7 system. the interrupt is generated on a certain date (or daily) at a certain time (e.g. 9:50 or every hour, every minute). a corresponding organization block is then executed. interrupt, watchdog a watchdog interrupt is generated periodically by the cpu in configurable time intervals. a corresponding 3 organization block is then executed. isolated on isolated i/o modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are galvanically isolated, for example by optocoupler, relay contact or transformer. input/output circuits can be connected to a common potential. load memory the load memory is part of the central processing unit. it contains objects generated by the programming device. it is implemented either as a plug-in memory card or a permanently integrated memory.
glossary glossary-9 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 local data 3 data, temporary master when they are in possession of the 3 token, masters can send data to other nodes and request data from other nodes (= active node). memory card memory cards are memory media in smart card format for cpus and cps. they are implemented as 3 ram or 3 feprom. module parameters module parameters are values which can be used to control the response of the module. a distinction is made between static and dynamic module parameters. mpi the multipoint interface (mpi) is the programming device interface of simatic s7. it enables the simultaneous operation of several stations (programming devices, text displays, operator panels) on one or more central processing units. each station is identified by a unique address (mpi address). mpi address 3 mpi nesting depth one block can be called from another by means of a block call. nesting depth is the number of 3 code blocks called at the same time. non-isolated on non-isolated input/output modules, there is an electrical connection between the reference potentials of the control and load circuits. ob 3 organization block
glossary glossary-10 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 ob priority the 3 operating system of the cpu distinguishes between various priority classes, such as cyclic program scanning, process interrupt-driven program scanning, etc. each priority class is assigned 3 organization blocks (ob) in which the s7 user can program a response. the obs have different standard priorities which determine the order in which they are executed or interrupted in the event that they are activated simultaneously. organization block organization blocks (obs) represent the interface between the operating system of the cpu and the user program. the processing sequence of the user program is defined in the organization blocks. operating mode the simatic s7 programmable controllers have the following operating modes: stop, 3 start-up, run. operating system of the cpu the operating system of the cpu organizes all functions and processes of the cpu which are not associated with a special control task. parameter 1. variable of a step 7 code block 2. variable for setting the behavior of a module (one or more per module). each module is delivered with a suitable default setting, which can be changed by configuring the parameters in step 7 . parameters can be 3 static parameters or 3 dynamic parameters parameters, dynamic unlike static parameters, dynamic parameters of modules can be changed during operation by calling an sfc in the user program, for example limit values of an analog signal input module. parameters, static unlike dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the user program, but only by changing the configuration in step 7 , for example the input delay on a digital signal input module.
glossary glossary-11 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 pg 3 programming device priority class the operating system of an s7-cpu provides up to 26 priority classes (or aruntime levelso) to which various organization blocks are assigned. the priority classes determine which obs interrupt other obs. if a priority class includes several obs, they do not interrupt each other, but are executed sequentially. profibus-dp digital, analog and intelligent modules of the programmable controller as well as a wide range of field devices to en 50170, part 3, such as drivers or valve terminals, are installed in a distributed configuration in the direct vicinity of the process - across distances of up to 23 km (14.375 miles). the modules and field devices are connected to the programmable controller via the profibus-dp fieldbus and addressed in the same way as centralized i/os. plc 3 programmable controller programmable controller programmable controllers (plcs) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the control unit. the configuration and wiring of the unit are therefore independent of the function of the control system. the programmable controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of a 3 cpu (central processing unit) with memory, input/output groups and an internal bus system. the i/os and the programming language are oriented to control engineering needs. process image the process image is part of the 3 system memory of the cpu. the signal states of the input modules are written into the process-image input table at the start of the cyclic program. at the end of the cyclic program, the signal states in the process-image output table are transferred to the output modules. process interrupt a process interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules on the occurrence of a specific event in the process. the process interrupt is reported to the cpu. the assigned 3 organization block is then processed in accordance with the priority of this interrupt.
glossary glossary-12 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 programming device programming devices are essentially personal computers which are compact, portable and suitable for industrial applications. they are equipped with special hardware and software for simatic programmable controllers. ram a ram (random access memory) is a semiconductor read/write memory. the following can be made retentive: s bit memories s s7 timers ( not for cpu 312 ifm) s s7 counters s data areas (only with memory card or integral eprom) reference ground 3 ground reference potential potential with reference to which the voltages of participating circuits are observed and/or measured. restart when a central processing unit is started up (e.g. by switching the mode selector from stop to run or by switching the power on), organization block ob 100 (complete restart) is executed before cyclic program execution commences (ob 1). on a complete restart, the process-image input table is read in and the step 7 user program is executed starting with the first command in ob 1. retentivity a memory area is retentive if its contents are retained even after a power failure and a change from stop to run. the non-retentive area of memory markers, timers and counters is reset following a power failure and a transition from the stop mode to the run mode. runtime error error which occurs during execution of the user program on the programmable controller (and not in the process).
glossary glossary-13 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 segment 3 bus segment set breakpoint sfb 3 system function block sfc 3 system function scan rate the scan rate determines the frequency with which 3 gd packets are transmitted and received on the basis of the cpu cycle. signal module signal modules (sm) represent the interface between the process and the programmable controller. input and output modules can be digital (input/output module, digital) or analog (input/output module, analog). slave a slave can only exchange data with a 3 master when so requested by the master. start-up restart mode is activated on a transition from stop mode to run mode. can be triggered by the 3 mode selector or after power on or an operator action on the programming device. in the case of the S7-300 a 3 restart is carried out. step 7 programming language for developing user programs for simatic s7 plcs. substitute value substitute values are configurable values which output modules transmit to the process when the cpu switches to stop mode.
glossary glossary-14 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 system diagnostics system diagnostics is the term used to describe the detection, evaluation and signaling of errors which occur within the programmable controller. examples of such errors are program errors or module failures. system errors can be displayed with led indicators or in step 7 . system function a system function (sfc) is a 3 function integrated in the operating system of the cpu that can be called, as required, in the step 7 user program. system function block a system function block (sfb) is a 3 function block which is integrated in the operating system of the cpu and which can be called in the step 7 user program as required. system memory the system memory is integrated on the central processing unit and implemented as a ram memory. the system memory includes the operand areas (for example timers, counters, bit memories, etc.) as well as the data areas (for example communication buffers) required internally by the 3 operating system. system state list the system status list contains data describing the current status of an S7-300. you can use it to gain an overview of the following at any time: s the S7-300 configuration s the current parameterization of the cpu and the parameterizable signal modules s the current statuses and sequences in the cpu and the parameterizable signal modules. terminating resistor a terminating resistor is a resistor used to terminate a data communication line in order to prevent reflection. time-of-day interrupt 3 interrupt, time-of-day
glossary glossary-15 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 timer 3 times times (timer cells) times are part of the 3 system memory of the cpu. the contents of the atimer cellso are updated automatically by the operating system asynchronously to the user program. step 7 instructions are used to define the exact function of the timer cells (for example on-delay) and initiate their execution (e.g. start). token access right on bus transmission rate rate of data transfer (bps) ungrounded having no galvanic connection to ground user memory the user memory contains the 3 code and 3 data blocks of the user program. the user memory can be integrated in the cpu or can be provided on plug-in memory cards or memory modules. the user program is always executed in the 3 working memory of the cpu, however. user program the simatic system distinguishes between the 3 operating system of the cpu and user programs. the latter are created with the programming software 3 step 7 in the available programming languages (ladder logic and statement list) and saved in code blocks. data are stored in data blocks. varistor voltage-independent resistor version the product version differentiates between products which have the same order number. the product version is increased with each upwardly compatible function extension, production-related modification (use of new components) or bug-fix.
glossary glossary-16 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 watchdog interrupt 3 interrupt, watchdog working memory the working memory is a random-access memory in the 3 cpu which the processor accesses during program execution. in the event of an input access error, a substitute value can be written to the accumulator instead of the input value which could not be read (sfc 44).
index-1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 index a accessories, g-1 accumulator, glossary-1 backup, 8-5 changing, 7-2 inserting, 6-4 address, glossary-1 address allocation, user-defined, 3-4 address area, cpu 31x-2, 9-2 addresses analog module, 3-6 digital module, 3-5 integrated inputs and outputs, 3-8 addressing, 3-1 default, 3-2 slot-based, 3-2 ambient temperature, permissible, 2-2 analog module, glossary-1 addresses, 3-6 approvals, a-1 area of application, a-2 arrangement, of modules, 2-5 b backplane bus, glossary-1 backup, 8-5 backup battery, glossary-1 backup, 8-5 changing, 7-2 disposal, 7-3 inserting, 6-4 backup, memory, glossary-2 basic circuit diagram, cpu 312 ifm, 8-27 batf, 8-15 battery, glossary-1 bit memory, glossary-2 bus, glossary-2 backplane, glossary-1 bus cable connection to the rs 485 repeater, 5-21 length of spur lines, 5-13 profibus, 5-16 bus connector, 5-15 connecting to the module, 5-18 disconnecting, 5-19 purpose, 5-17 setting the terminating resistor, 5-18 bus runtimes, profibus-dp subnet, 10-9 bus segment, glossary-2 see also segment busf, 9-4, 9-16 c cable length, maximum, 5-13 cable lengths, in the subnet, 5-12 cable/wiring routing emc, 4-174-19 inside buildings, 4-13 outside buildings, 4-174-19 cables, shielded, connecting, 4-39 calculation, response time, 10-3 calculation example, interrupt response time, 10-16 ce, symbol, a-1 changing modules, 7-5 the accumulator, 7-2 the backup battery, 7-2 characteristic impedance. see terminating resistor chassis ground, glossary-2 clearance measurements, 2-3 clock, cpu, 8-9 code block, glossary-2 cold start, 6-12 with mode selector, 6-12 with mode selector, 6-14 commissioning, 6-1 cpu 31x-2 as a dp master, 6-17 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 6-18 profibus-dp, 6-16 software prerequisites, 6-1
index index-2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 communication cpu, 8-11 cpu 318-2, 8-57 global data, 8-11 pg/op-cpu, 8-11 communication sfcs for configured s7 connections, 8-11 communication sfcs for non-configured s7 connections, 8-11 communication via mpi, cycle load, 10-2 components for mpi subnet, 5-6 for profibus-dp subnet, 5-6 for the mpi subnet, 5-15 for the profibus-dp subnet, 5-15 of an S7-300, 1-3 compression, glossary-3 configuration, glossary-3 arrangement of modules, 2-5 grounded reference potential, 4-9 in the tn-s system, 4-7 lightning protection, 4-20 mechanical, 2-1, 2-2 overvoltage protection, 4-20 ungrounded reference potential, 4-9 with isolated modules, 4-11 with non-isolated modules, 4-13 with process i/os, 4-5 configuration frame, 9-32 connecting a programming device, 6-5 bus connector, 5-18 connecting cables, for interface modules, 2-7 consistent data, glossary-3 cont_c, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 cont_s, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 contents of the manual, iii control elements, cpu, 8-2 counter, glossary-3 cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 counter a/b, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 cpu clock, 8-9 communication, 8-11 control elements, 8-2 differences between the versions, 11-4 dimensioned drawing, e-1 display elements, 8-2 fault displays, 8-3 mode selector, 8-4 operating system, glossary-10 resetting, 6-11 runtime meter, 8-9 status displays, 8-3 system state list, d-1 testing functions, 8-13 wiring, 4-32 cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 basic circuit diagram, 8-27 connecting the power supply, 8-27 grounded configuration, 8-26 integrated functions, 8-18 short-circuit characteristics, 8-27 technical specifications, 8-22 terminal connections, 8-26 cpu 313, 8-28 technical specifications, 8-28 cpu 314, 8-30 technical specifications, 8-30 cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 basic circuit diagrams, 8-45 integrated functions, 8-32 technical specifications, 8-36 wiring schematic, 8-44 cpu 315, 8-48 technical specifications, 8-48 cpu 315-2 dp, 8-50 see also cpu 31x-2 commissioning as a dp master, 6-17 commissioning as a dp slave, 6-18 dp master, 9-3 technical specifications, 8-50
index index-3 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 cpu 316-2 dp, 8-53 see also cpu 31x-2 commissioning as a dp master , 6-17 commissioning as a dp slave, 6-18 technical specifications, 8-53 cpu 318-2, 8-56 see also cpu 31x-2 commissioning as a dp master, 6-17 commissioning as a dp slave, 6-18 communication, 8-57 differences to other cpu 300s, 11-2 technical specifications, 8-57 cpu 31x-2 bus interruption, 9-9, 9-20, 9-37 diagnostic addresses for profibus, 9-8, 9-19 direct communication, 9-36 dp address areas, 9-2 dp master diagnosis with leds, 9-4 diagnostics with step 7, 9-5 dp slave, 9-10 diagnosis with leds, 9-16 diagnosis with step 7, 9-16 diagnostics, 9-15 intermediate memory, 9-11 status changes, 9-9, 9-20, 9-37 csa, a-2 custumer support, vii cycle control, processing time, 10-6 cycle extension, through interrupts, 10-10 cycle load, communication via mpi, 10-2 cycle time, 10-2, glossary-3 calculation example, 10-10 extending, 10-3 d data consistent, glossary-3 statistic, glossary-4 temporary, glossary-4 data block, glossary-3 default addressing, 3-2 delay, of inputs / outputs, 10-8 delay interrupt, glossary-8 reproducibility, 10-17 device. see node device master file, glossary-4 diagnosis led display, 8-15 module, cpu 315-2 dp as dp slave, 9-25 station, cpu 31x-2 as slave, 9-26 with step 7, 8-15 diagnostic addresses, cpu 31x-2, 9-8, 9-19 diagnostic buffer, glossary-4 diagnostic interrupt, glossary-4 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-27 diagnostic interrupt response time, of the cpus, 10-15 diagnostics cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-15 direct communication, 9-37 system, glossary-14 differences, 318-2 to other cpus, 11-2 digital module, addresses, 3-5 dimensioned drawing, cpu, e-1 direct communication cpu 31x-2, 9-36 diagnostics, 9-37 display elements, cpu, 8-2 disposal, v backup battery, 7-3 documentation package, iii dp master, glossary-4 cpu 31x-2, 9-3 diagnosis with leds, 9-4 diagnostics with step 7, 9-5 dp slave, glossary-4 cpu 31x-2, 9-10 diagnosis with leds, 9-16 diagnosis with step 7, 9-16 dp slave diagnosis, structure, 9-21 e electrical installation, configuring, 4-2 electrical interference, protection against, 4-4 emc, cable/wiring routing, 4-17 emergency stop, 4-2 equipotential bonding, 4-22, glossary-5 error display, glossary-5 error response, glossary-5 esd guideline, f-1 execution time, user program, 10-2
index index-4 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 f fault displays, cpu, 8-3 fixing bracket, for shield terminals, 4-39 fm, approval, a-2 force, glossary-6 forcing, 8-13 frequency meter cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 front connector wiring, 4-35 wiring position, 4-36 front connector coding key removing from the front connector, 7-8 removing from the module, 7-7 front connector encoding, 4-38 function, fc, glossary-6 function block, fb, glossary-6 functional grounding, glossary-6 fuses, replacing, 7-9 g gd circle, glossary-6 receive conditions, 8-12 gd circuit scan rate, 8-12 send conditions, 8-12 gd element, glossary-6 gd packet, glossary-7 global data, glossary-7 send cycles, 8-12 global data communication, 8-11 ground, glossary-7 ground (to), glossary-7 grounded configuration, cpu 312 ifm, 8-26 grounding concept, 4-6 gsd file, glossary-4 guideline, egb, f-1 guidelines, for operating an S7-300, 4-2 h highest mpi address, 5-2 highest profibus address, 5-2 i iec 1131, a-1 iec counters, sfbs, list of, c-8 iec function, c-1 iec functions, fcs, list of the, c-8 iec timers, sfbs, list of, c-8 inputs, delay time, 10-8 inputs/outputs integrated, cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 integrated, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 installation, 2-9 configuring, 2-2 electrical, configuring, 4-2 horizontal, 2-2 of the modules, 2-13 vertical, 2-2 installation dimensions, of the modules, 2-4 installing rs 485 repeater, 5-20 the rail, 2-9 instance data block, glossary-7 insulation monitoring, 4-10 integrated functions, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 integrated inputs and outputs, addresses, 3-8 integrated inputs/outputs of the cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 of the cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 wiring, 4-35 interface, cpu, 8-7 interface module, connecting cables, 2-7 interface modules, 2-6 intermediate memory cpu 31x-2, 9-11 for data transfer, 9-11 internet, up-to-date information, vii interrupt, glossary-8 delay, glossary-8 diagnostic, glossary-4 process-, glossary-11 time-of-day, glossary-8 watchdog, glossary-8 interrupt response time, 10-14 calculation example, 10-16 interrupts cpu 315-2 dp as dp slave, 9-28 cycle extension, 10-10 isolated, glossary-8 k key, inserting, 2-15 key switch. see mode selector
index index-5 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 l labeling strip, 4-38 laying rules, profibus bus cable, 5-17 lightning protection, 4-20 high-voltage protection, 4-23 low-voltage protection, 4-27 lightning protection zones, 4-21 lightning strike, effects, 4-21 load circuit, grounding, 4-6 load memory, glossary-8 load power supplies, features, 4-6 load power supply, from the ps 307, 4-8 local data, glossary-9 m mains voltage, set to the power supply, 4-34 maintenance. see replacing manufacturer id, cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-24 master profibus address, 9-24 memory backup, glossary-2 load, glossary-8 system, glossary-14 user, glossary-15 working, glossary-16 memory card, 8-6, glossary-9 changing, 6-36-20 inserting, 6-36-20 purpose, 8-6 memory reset, 6-11 mpi parameters, 6-16 with mode selector, 6-12 mode selector, 8-4 cold start, 6-12 cold start with, 6-14 resetting the memory with, 6-12 module accessories, g-1 arrangement, 2-5 installation dimensions, 2-4 non-isolated, 4-13 removing, 7-6 module diagnosis, cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-25 module parameter, glossary-9 module start address, 3-2 modules installation, 2-13 isolated, 4-11 open, 2-1 replacing, 7-5 mpi, glossary-9 mpi address highest, 5-2 recommendation, 5-4 mpi addresses, rules, 5-3 mpi interface, 8-7 mpi subnet cable lengths, 5-12 components, 5-6, 5-15 configuration example, 5-9, 5-11 configuration rules, 5-5 segment, 5-12 mres mode, 8-4 n nesting depth, glossary-9 network components, 5-15 networking, 5-1 node, 5-2 non-isolated, glossary-9 o ob, b-1, glossary-10 ob 40 start information for inputs/outputs, 8-33 start information for integrated inputs/outputs, 8-19 ob priority, glossary-10 open modules, 2-1 operating an S7-300 guidelines, 4-2 rules, 4-2 operating mode, glossary-10 operating system of the cpu, glossary-10 processing time, 10-6 organization block, b-1, glossary-10 outputs, delay time, 10-8 overvoltage, 4-21 overvoltage protection, 4-17, 4-20
index index-6 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 p parameter, glossary-10 parameter assignment frame, 9-30 parameters, modules, glossary-9 pg/op-cpu communication, 8-11 pno, certificate, a-3 positioning, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 power connector, 4-32 power consumption, of an S7-300, rules, 4-4 power loss, of an S7-300, rules, 4-4 power supply, setting the mains voltage, 4-34 power supply module, wiring, 4-32 priority, ob, glossary-10 priority class, glossary-11 process image, glossary-11 process image update, processing time, 10-6 process interrupt, glossary-11 cpu 312 ifm, 8-18 cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-27 process interrupt handling, 10-15 process interrupt response time of the cpus, 10-14 of the signal modules, 10-15 processing time cycle control, 10-6 operating system, 10-6 process image update, 10-6 user program, 10-7 profibus address, highest, 5-2 profibus addresses recommendation, 5-4 rules, 5-3 profibus bus cable, 5-15, 5-16 laying rules, 5-17 profibus-dp, glossary-11 commissioning, 6-16 profibus-dp interface, 8-7 profibus-dp subnet bus runtimes, 10-9 cable lengths, 5-12 components, 5-6, 5-15 configuration example, 5-10, 5-11 configuration rules, 5-5 programming device connecting, 6-5 to an ungrounded configuration, 6-9 via spur line to subnet, 6-8 protection against electrical interference, 4-4 protective conductor connection, on rail, 2-12 protective measures, for the whole plant, 4-5 pulsegen, cpu 314 ifm, 8-32 r rail installing, 2-9 length, 2-4 protective conductor connection, 2-12 receive conditions, gd circuit, 8-12 recycling, v reference literature, h-1 reference potential grounded, 4-9 ungrounded, 4-9 release. see version removing, module, 7-6 repeater. see rs 485-repeater replacement parts, g-1 replacing fuses, 7-9 modules, 7-5 reproducibility, delay/watchdog interrupts, 10-17 reset, with mode selector, 8-4 response time, 10-3 calculation, 10-3 calculation example, 10-10 calculation of, 10-6 interrupt, 10-14 longest, 10-5 shortest, 10-4 restart, glossary-12 retentivity, glossary-12 routing, 8-11 rs 485 repeater, 5-15, 5-19 connecting the bus cable, 5-21 rs 485-repeater, installation, 5-20 rules for operating an S7-300, 4-2 for the configuration of a subnet, 5-5 for wiring, 4-30 run mode, 8-4 runtime error, glossary-12 runtime meter, cpu, 8-9
index index-7 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 s s7 timers, updating, 10-7 S7-300, 1-2 accessories, g-1 components, 1-3 grounding concept, 4-6 replacement parts, g-1 switching on for the first time, 6-10 scan rate, glossary-13 gd circuit, 8-12 scope, of this manual, iv segment, 5-5 mpi subnet, 5-12 send conditions, gd circuit, 8-12 send cycles, for global data, 8-12 sf, 8-15 sfb, c-1 sfbs, list of the, c-2 sfc, c-1 sfcs, list of the, c-2 shield contact element, 4-39 shield terminal, 4-39 short-circuit characteristics, cpu 312 ifm, 8-27 signal module, glossary-13 simatic s7, reference literature, h-1 sinec l2-dp. see profibus-dp slot number, 3-2 slot numbers, assigning, 2-15 spur lines, length, 5-13 ssl. see system state list standards, a-1 start information for inputs/outputs, ob 40, 8-33 start information for integrated inputs/outputs, ob 40, 8-19 start-up, glossary-13 cpu 31x-2 dp as a dp slave, 6-19 cpu 31x-2 dp as dp master, 6-17 station diagnosis, cpu 31x-2 as dp slave, 9-26 station status 1 to 3, 9-22 status displays, cpu, 8-3 stop, led, 8-15 stop mode, 8-4 strain relief, 4-37 subnet, 5-1 substitute value, glossary-13 supply, grounded, 4-5 surge protection, components, 4-26, 4-27 switching on, first time, 6-10 system diagnosis, glossary-14 system function, sfc, glossary-14 system function block, sfb, glossary-14 system functions, c-1 system memory, glossary-14 system state list, d-1 t terminating resistor, 5-6, glossary-14 example, 5-8 setting on the bus connector, 5-18 testing functions, 8-13 time-of-day interrupt, glossary-8 times (timer cells), glossary-15 tips and tricks, 12-1 u ul, a-2 ungrounded, glossary-15 ungrounded configuration, connecting a programming device, 6-9 updating, of the s7 timers, 10-7 user memory, glossary-15 user program, glossary-15 processing time, 10-7 user program execution time, 10-2 user-defined address allocation, 3-4 v version, glossary-15 w watchdog interrupt, glossary-8 reproducibility, 10-17 wiring, 4-30 integrated inputs/outputs, 4-35 the cpu, 4-32 the front connector, 4-35 the power supply module, 4-32 wiring position, of the front connector, 4-36 wiring rules, 4-30 working memory, glossary-16
index index-8 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02
1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 $ to siemens ag a&d as e 82 postfach 1963 d92209 amberg from yourname: _______________________________ your title: ______________________________ company name: _______________________________ street: _______________________________ city, zip code: _____________________________ country: ______________________________ phone: ______________________________ please check any industry that applies to you: r automotive r chemical r electrical machinery r food r instrument and control r nonelectrical machinery r petrochemical r pharmaceutical r plastic r pulp and paper r textiles r transportation r other _ ____________
2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 additional comments: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor). 1. do the contents meet your requirements? 2. is the information you need easy to find? 3. is the text easy to understand? 4. does the level of technical detail meet your requirements? 5. please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: remarks form your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications. please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to siemens.
1 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 $ to siemens ag a&d as e 82 postfach 1963 d92209 amberg from yourname: _______________________________ your title: ______________________________ company name: _______________________________ street: _______________________________ city, zip code: _____________________________ country: ______________________________ phone: ______________________________ please check any industry that applies to you: r automotive r chemical r electrical machinery r food r instrument and control r nonelectrical machinery r petrochemical r pharmaceutical r plastic r pulp and paper r textiles r transportation r other _ ____________
2 S7-300 programmable controller hardware and installation ewa 4neb 710 6084-02 additional comments: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor). 1. do the contents meet your requirements? 2. is the information you need easy to find? 3. is the text easy to understand? 4. does the level of technical detail meet your requirements? 5. please rate the quality of the graphics/tables: remarks form your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness of our publications. please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire and return it to siemens.

▲Up To Search▲

Price & Availability of S7-300

	To Download S7-300 Datasheet File
If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .